JP2020168182A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of imparting a moderate profit to a player.SOLUTION: When a game round in which a jackpot occurs is completed, an opening/closing execution mode is started. In the opening/closing execution mode, a special electric winning device is opened and closed, and game balls are put out when game balls enter the special electric winning device. The total number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode occurring in an advantageous period is measured by a total round number counter 64c. When a value of the total round number counter 64c becomes a first reference value or larger, a shooting period of game balls is changed to a long period. When a value of the total round number counter 64c becomes the first reference value or larger, a variation continuation period of a game round is extended. When a game round resulting in a predetermined jackpot result occurs in a situation in which a value of the total round number counter 64c is a third reference value or larger, a variation continuation period of the game round becomes the longest period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these game machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed so that the player can predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry section provided in the game area, and a variable display of the pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. It is known that when a winning result is obtained, a combination of specific patterns and the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface to shift to a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device (for example). See Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-125488

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is preferable that an appropriate profit is given to the player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of giving an appropriate profit to a player.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems includes a profit-giving means for giving a profit to a player based on the occurrence of a profit-giving event caused by the game.
A situation-determining means for determining the subsequent game situation according to the player's advantage,
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to give an appropriate profit to the player.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine by disassembling. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of the symbol display apparatus (a)-(j). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of the symbol display apparatus (a) and (b). It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the distribution table for 1st special drawing, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the distribution table for 2nd special drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the firing control processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special figure change in a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special drawing determination in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of special electric power in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during closing of a special electric power | generation in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric termination processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command correspondence processing in a sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the cycle setting process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the period adjustment process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process of the effect pattern in the sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the data table for game times production which is selected when the small hit result is not obtained. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the movie image dedicated to the longest period displayed on the symbol display device, and (b) is a time chart showing the timing when the display of the remaining time image is started. (A)-(c) It is a time chart for demonstrating how the variation display of a symbol is performed in the symbol sequence of the symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the data table for game times production. It is a flowchart showing (a) the selection process of the final stop period in the main MPU, (b) the flowchart which shows the selection process of the opening period in the main MPU, and (c) the selection process of the interval period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows (d) the selection process of the ending period in the main MPU. (A) to (e) When the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, per unit time. It is a time chart showing how the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode in the above is gradually generated. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure concerning the discharge of the game ball which flowed down the game area in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various areas of the main side RAM used for managing the payout rate. It is a flowchart which shows the ball output rate monitoring process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry management processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the cycle setting process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the period adjustment process in the main MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the process during special drawing determination executed by the main side MPU in 3rd Embodiment, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the storage area of the main side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the cycle setting process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the period adjustment process in the main MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the base sequence table in 4th Embodiment, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the additional sequence table. It is a flowchart which shows the period adjustment process in the main MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st base sequence table in 5th Embodiment, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd base sequence table, and (c) 3rd base sequence table It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (d) the 4th base sequence table. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration period executed by the main MPU in 6th Embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the normal use period table, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the shortening period table. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st base sequence table in 7th Embodiment, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd base sequence table, and (c) 3rd base sequence table It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric termination processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special drawing determination in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in the main MPU. (A) to (g) are time charts showing how each of the non-regulated status, the first regulated status, and the second regulated status is set. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special drawing determination executed by the main MPU in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special drawing determination executed by the main MPU in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric termination processing in the main MPU.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration for the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on the island equipment of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The game machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 by using the unlocking key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. The guide rail is configured as. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

By the way, the game ball launch mechanism 27 has a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying the game ball stored in the upper plate 55a described later onto the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. It is provided with a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by the rotation operation of the launch operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided at the lower right corner of the front door frame 14, and the game ball is launched.

As shown in FIG. 1, the launch operation device 28 is provided so as to project forward from the base surface of the front door frame 14, and includes an operation base 29a and an operation handle 29b. The operation handle 29b is formed in an annular shape, and is rotatably supported by the operation base 29a while being sandwiched by the operation base 29a in the front-rear direction. The rotation axis of the operation handle 29b is in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, and there is a portion on the outer peripheral surface thereof where a player's finger can be hung during the rotation operation of the operation handle 29b. The operation handle 29b is urged toward the initial position by a spring (not shown), and is rotated to the right by the player to rotate to the right against the urging force. Then, the larger the amount of rotation toward the right side, the stronger the firing intensity of the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special figure unit 37, a normal drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39. Etc. are provided respectively.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when one game ball enters the first operating port 33 or when one game ball enters the second operating port 34. Is executed to pay out one game ball, and when one game ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, 10 game balls are paid out to the special electric winning device 32. When one of the game balls is entered, 15 game balls are paid out.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 may be smaller than that in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is the first operating port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out opening 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning openings or the like are discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the flow of the game area PA is continued without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into the game is also referred to as a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are opened upward. Further, both operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operating port 33 faces upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with a universal electric accessory 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the general electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win a prize in the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it becomes possible to win a prize in the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball from the second operating port 34. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning the prize. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35, and a normal map display of the normal map unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. The variable display of the pattern is performed in the part 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the winning of the electric service opening, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the general map display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the general electric opening state. In the general electric power open state, the general electric power accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

The cathode ray display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device and an organic EL display device are used. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix display devices. In addition, as a pattern that is variablely displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal drawing unit 38, a normal drawing holding display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal drawing display unit 38a. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the through gate 35 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the general drawing reservation display unit 38b.

A winning lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Then, the lottery result is clarified through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

Regarding the special figure unit 37 In detail, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display unit 37a and a second special figure display unit 37b. The display area of the first special symbol display unit 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and similarly, the display area of the second special symbol display unit 37b is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Further, the area of the display area including the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is also smaller than that of the display surface 41a.

In the first special figure display unit 37a, a winning lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 as a trigger, so that a variable display of the pattern or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Further, in the second special figure display unit 37b, a winning lottery is performed by using a winning prize in the second operating port 34 as a trigger, so that a variable display of a pattern or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

The first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b are composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, it may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. Further, as the pattern displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, and a plurality of types of characters Is displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed is conceivable.

In the special figure unit 37, the first special figure reservation display unit 37c and the second special figure reservation display unit 37d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. .. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the first operating port 33 is held up to four, and the held number is displayed by lighting the first special figure hold display unit 37c. Further, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the second operating port 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the second special figure reservation display unit 37d.

Regarding the symbol display device 41 In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 90 described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. You may.

In the symbol display device 41, when the first special symbol display unit 37a performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol based on the winning of the first operating port 33, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is displayed accordingly. At the same time, when the second special figure display unit 37b performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the pattern based on the winning of the second operating port 34, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is performed accordingly. .. In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by winning a prize in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, but also the display effect in the opening / closing execution mode, which will be described later, which shifts after winning the prize, etc. Is done.

The display contents when the symbol display device 41 performs variable display of the symbol will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing individual symbols that are variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIGS. 4 (a) to 4 (j), the symbols which are a kind of the symbols are 9 kinds of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" and shell-shaped symbols. It is composed of a sub-design consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface 41a, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 5B, on the display surface 41a, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become like. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display surface 41a. ..

When a variable display of symbols is performed on the display surface 41a based on winning a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the symbols in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display is started as shown. Then, basically, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It ends with. In addition, when the variation display of the symbol ends, if the result of the internal lottery is the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, which will be described later, they are the same on either effective line. If a combination of odd-numbered symbols or a combination of the same even-numbered symbols is formed and the result of the internal lottery is a 2R high-accuracy jackpot result or a small-winning result, which will be described later, the predetermined symbol will be placed on one of the effective lines. A combination (eg, "3.4.1") is formed.

In addition, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the variable display is started by any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 41, and the predetermined result is displayed and ended. Is equivalent to one game. Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as the symbol.

When a big hit or a small win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 33, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won. Similarly, even if a big hit or a small win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 34, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won.

Returning to the description of FIG. 3, the special electric winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and is provided with an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in either the closed state or the open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. By the way, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which the mode shifts when a hit result is obtained. It should be noted that, although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which winning is less likely to occur than in the open state.

The round display unit 39 displays the number of round games that occur in the open / close execution mode. Here, the opening / closing execution mode includes a round number specifying mode that occurs when a big hit is won and an opening / closing number specifying mode that occurs when a small hit is won. The round number regulation mode is an opening / closing execution mode that is executed up to a predetermined number of round games. A round game is a game that continues until either a predetermined opening duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins a special electric winning device 32. That is. The number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode differs depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 displays the number of times of the round game or the corresponding display. Further, the display on the round display unit 39 is started when the open / close execution mode is started, and is ended when the open / close execution mode is ended and a new game round is started. On the other hand, in the open / close number regulation mode, the round game is not set, the number of times of opening / closing of the special electric winning device 32 is the upper limit, and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the special electric winning device 32. It is terminated based on the condition of either one of the above. In the open / close number regulation mode, the round display unit 39 is maintained in the non-display state.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 formed by attaching the game board 24 having the above configuration to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 so that almost the entire area of the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the gaming area PA is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting unit 53 is provided above the window unit 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 54 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 56 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 76, which will be described later, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 55a.

Next, the configuration on the back side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 housed in a board box. In addition, the substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably bonded to each other, and a predetermined portion must be destroyed at the time of separation, or the adhesive layer remains on the bonding target at the time of peeling. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of what has been done is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can be considered.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism unit 73 and a control device collecting unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game ball paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with, for example, a back pack substrate having a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying a main power supply of 24 volts AC.

The control device collective unit 74 generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by the operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. It is equipped with a power supply / launch control device 78 that controls the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 is a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 62, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A certain RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of the control device other than the main control device 60.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 62, and a payout control device 77 is also connected to the input side. A power supply / emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, and power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 65.

Various sensors such as various prize detection sensors 66a to 66e are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The various prize detection sensors 66a to 66e are provided one-to-one with respect to the winning portion corresponding to winning such as the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35. The detection sensor is included, and the MPU 62 determines the winning of each ball entry portion. Further, in the MPU 62, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34.

A power failure monitoring board 65, a payout control device 77, and a voice emission control device 80 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77, for example, based on the winning determination result for the winning ball unit corresponding to the winning. Various commands such as fluctuation commands, type commands, and opening commands are output to the voice emission control device 80. Details of these various commands will be described later. The MPU 62 transmits a command to the voice emission control device 80 by parallel communication.

On the output side of the MPU 62, there is a drive unit 32b for special electric power that opens and closes the opening / closing door 32a of the special electric winning device 32, and a drive unit 34b for general electric power that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34. The figure unit 37, the normal figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display unit 37a, a second special figure display unit 37b, a first special figure hold display unit 37c, and a second special figure hold display unit 37d. Are all connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the normal drawing unit 38 is provided with a normal drawing display unit 38a and a normal drawing holding display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b is executed in the MPU 62 so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed. Further, when the open state of the utility accessory 34a is won, the drive control of the drive unit 34b for the utility is executed in the MPU 62 so that the utility accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, in the game times and the opening / closing execution mode, the display control of the special figure unit 37 is executed in the MPU 62. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is clearly indicated, the display control of the general drawing unit 38 is executed in the MPU 62. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the display control of the round display unit 39 is executed in the MPU 62.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply / emission control device 78, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 60.

The power supply / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied.

Specifically, the power supply / emission control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit 78a during power-on and a power supply unit 78b during power failure for the configuration for supplying the operating power. The power supply unit 78a during power-on is connected to a commercial power source in a game hall or the like, and generates operating power in a situation where external power is supplied from the commercial power source, and supplies the generated operating power. Has the function of The power supply unit 78b during power interruption is composed of a capacitor, and the power supplied from the power supply unit 78a during power supply when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from an external power supply). Is charged by. Further, in a power cut state (when the power supply from the external power supply is cut off) such as when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply, the power is discharged from the power supply unit 78b during power failure. Backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the control device 60 and the RAM (not shown) of the payout control device 77. Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 and the RAM of the payout control device 77 is not erased while the backup power is being supplied from the power supply unit 78b during power failure. Memory is retained.

Here, the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 temporarily stores information on the current game state and the progress of the game, and the RAM of the payout control device 77 temporarily stores information on the number of unpaid prize balls. Will be done. In this case, since the backup power is supplied to these RAMs from the power supply unit 78b during power interruption as described above, even if there is no power supply from the power supply unit 78a during power supply, the current game It is possible to store the state, the progress of the game, and the unpaid prize ball information for a predetermined period of time. On the other hand, backup power is not supplied to the voice emission control device 80 and the display control device 90 from the power supply unit 78b during power failure. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 84 of the voice emission control device 80 and the RAM 94 of the display control device 90 is not backed up, and is destroyed or destroyed when the power supply from the power supply unit 78a during power supply is stopped. It will be erased.

The capacity of the power supply unit 78b during power failure is secured relatively large, and the information stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 before the power is cut off is retained within a predetermined period (for example, one or two days). To. The power supply unit 78b during power failure is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, it is not necessary to store electricity in the power supply unit 78b during power failure when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, but it is necessary to replace the battery periodically.

The power supply / emission control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure (not shown), which is different from the power supply unit 78b for power failure. In the power supply / emission control device 78, even after the DC stable 24 volt power supply becomes less than 22 volt, the control system is discharged from the power supply unit for power failure for a sufficient period of time to execute the power failure process. It is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the driving power source of the power supply, at a normal value. As a result, the main control device 60 and the like can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The power supply / launch control device 78 is provided with a launch control unit 78c in addition to the various power supply units 78a and 78b. A touch sensor 28a, a push sensor 28b, and a variable resistor 28c built in the launch operation device 28 are electrically connected to the launch control unit 78c.

The touch sensor 28a has a built-in capacitor, and when the player's hand comes into contact with the outer surface of the operation handle 29b and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, a predetermined electric signal corresponding to the handle operation detection is emitted. Output to 78c. Upon receiving the predetermined electric signal, the launch control unit 78c recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operation handle 29b. Further, the launch control unit 78c grasps whether or not the launch stop switch of the launch operation device 28 is operated according to the electric signal received from the push sensor 28b, and also operates the operation handle according to the electric signal received through the variable resistor 28c. Grasp the rotation operation amount of 29b.

The launch control unit 78c transmits a condition satisfaction signal (for example, a HI level signal) to the MPU 62 when a predetermined launch condition of the game ball is satisfied. Specifically, the launch control unit 78c receives a signal from the touch sensor 28a indicating that the operation handle 29b is being touched by the player, and indicates that the launch stop switch is not manually operated by the player. On condition that the signal is received from the push sensor 28b, the condition satisfying signal is continuously transmitted to the MPU 62. If any of the above signals is not received, the condition satisfying signal is not transmitted to the MPU 62 (for example, it becomes a LOW level signal). Further, as a condition for transmitting the condition satisfying signal, in addition to the above condition, a condition that the ball lending device is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added.

The MPU 62 transmits a pulse-shaped launch instruction signal to the launch control unit 78c when a predetermined launch cycle has elapsed in a situation where the condition satisfaction signal is being received and the launch of the game ball can be permitted. When the launch control unit 78c receives the pulse-shaped launch instruction signal from the MPU 62, the launch control unit 78c drives and controls the game ball launch mechanism 27 once. In this case, if the game ball is continuously supplied to the game ball launch mechanism 27, one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every time a predetermined firing cycle elapses. Further, at the time of this firing, since the firing intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c, the game ball is launched with the intensity corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b. The details will be described later, but the predetermined firing cycle is measured by the MPU 62. There are a plurality of patterns of the predetermined firing cycle. Specifically, the first cycle that enables the firing of 100 game balls per minute, and the first cycle that enables the firing of 90 game balls per minute. Two cycles, a third cycle that enables the firing of 80 game balls per minute, and a fourth cycle that enables the firing of 70 game balls per minute are set.

The voice emission control device 80 includes a voice emission control board 81 on which the MPU 82 is mounted. The MPU 82 is a ROM 83 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 82, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 83 is executed. A RAM 84, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in.

The MPU 82 determines the content of the effect to be executed in the game times, the open / close execution mode, and the like, based on the command received from the main control device 60. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 provided on the front door frame 14 is performed, and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 provided on the front door frame 14 is performed so that the operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. I do.

The MPU 82 is electrically connected to the display control device 90. The MPU 82 transmits to the display control device 90 a command including the content of the effect determined based on the command received from the main control device 60 and a command including the content of the notification corresponding to the command received from the main control device 60. The display control device 90 is not configured to receive commands from the main control device 60 without going through the voice emission control device 80, and communicates with the voice emission control device 80 more than the voice emission control device 80 in relation to the main control device 60. It can be said that it exists on the downstream side of the direction.

The display control device 90 includes a display control board 91 on which the MPU 92 is mounted. The MPU 92 is a ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A certain RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in. The MPU 92 performs display control of the symbol display device 41 based on a command received from the voice emission control device 80.

Although not shown, the display control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data in the video RAM, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 62, ROM 63 and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63 and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 82, ROM 83 and RAM 84 of the voice emission control device 80 are sound. The optical side MPU 82, the sound light side ROM 83, and the sound light side RAM 84 are referred to, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the display control device 90 are referred to as a display side MPU 92, a display side ROM 93, and a display side RAM 94, respectively.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery with MPU 62 of main control device 60>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

The main MPU 62 uses various counter information during the game to perform a winning lottery, set the display of the first special figure display unit 37a, set the display of the second special figure display unit 37b, and set the symbol display of the symbol display device 41. , The display of the general figure display unit 38a is set, and specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of a hit and the jackpot type are used for determining the type. The jackpot type counter C2 to be used, the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 41 deviates and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and each special figure. The display units 37a and 37b and the fluctuation type counter CS that determines the fluctuation duration of the game times in the symbol display device 41 are used. Further, the general electric random number counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the electric service open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 121 of the RAM 64.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. The numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special figure holding area 122 when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. The special figure holding area 122 includes a first special figure holding area 125, a second special figure holding area 126, and an execution area 127 for special drawing.

The first special figure holding area 125 includes a first area 125a, a second area 125b, a third area 125c, and a fourth area 125d, and a winning random number counter C1 is provided according to the winning history of the first operating port 33. Each numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 125a to 125d as the hold information on the first special figure side. In this case, in the first area 125a to the fourth area 125d, when the winning of the first operating port 33 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 125a → the second area 125b → the third area 125c → the third. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of 4 areas 125d. By providing the four areas 125a to 125d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the first operating port 33 can be reserved and stored. The number of items that can be stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is not limited to four, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , May be singular.

The second special figure holding area 126 includes the first area 126a, the second area 126b, the third area 126c, and the fourth area 126d, and the hit random number counter C1 is provided according to the winning history of the second operating port 34. Each numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 126a to 126d as the reserved information on the second special figure side. In this case, in the first area 126a to the fourth area 126d, when the winning of the second operating port 34 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area 126a → the second area 126b → the third area 126c → the third area 126c. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the four areas 126d. By providing the four areas 126a to 126d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the second operating port 34 can be reserved and stored. The number of items that can be stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is not limited to four, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , May be singular.

In the execution area 127 for the special figure, when the variable display is started on any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b, the hold information for the target for which the hit / fail judgment and the distribution judgment for the special figure are to be performed is stored. It is an area. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a is started, the hold information on the first special figure side stored in the first area 125a of the first special figure hold area 125 is used for the special figure. Is moved to the execution area 127. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display unit 37b is started, the hold information on the second special figure side stored in the first area 126a of the second special figure hold area 126 is the execution area for the special figure. Moved to 127.

The information corresponding to the normal electric random number counter C4 is stored in the normal figure holding area 123 when a prize is won in the through gate 35. The normal figure holding area 123 includes a first area 128a, a second area 128b, a third area 128c, and a fourth area 128d, and numerical information of the normal electric random number counter C4 according to the winning history to the through gate 35. Is stored in any of the areas 128a to 128d as the reserved information on the normal drawing side. In this case, in the first area 128a to the fourth area 128d, when the through gate 35 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area 128a → the second area 128b → the third area 128c → the fourth area. Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of 128d. By providing the four areas 128a to 128d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the through gate 35 can be reserved and stored. The number of items that can be stored in the holding area 123 is not limited to four, and may be any number of items, such as two, three, or five or more. It may be.

An execution area 129 for a normal map is provided in the normal map reservation area 123. The execution area 129 for the normal map is an area in which the hold information for which the hit / fail determination for support is to be determined is stored when the variable display is started on the normal map display unit 38a. Specifically, when the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 128a of the normal map hold area 123 is moved to the execution area 129 for the normal map.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the Fuden random number counter C4 will be described. The normal electric random number counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250 and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The normal electric random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the normal figure holding area 123 of the main RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric accessory 34a to the open state according to the value of the stored general electric random number counter C4.

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric accessory 34a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when the game ball is continuously launched to the game area PA in the same manner, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of opening is relatively high or low.

In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the normal power open state in the normal power open lottery using the normal power random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5), but it is high. In the frequency support mode, the number of times the normal power accessory 34a is opened when the normal power open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and one open period is set longer. There is. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the general electric power open state is won and the general electric accessory 34a is opened multiple times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing period is set shorter than one opening period. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured period (that is, the general drawing) that is secured for the next public electric opening lottery after one public electric opening lottery is performed. The duration of one fluctuation on the display unit 38a) is set short.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 33 is higher than that of the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than the first operating port 33. The probability that a prize will be given to the mouth 34 increases.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the open state per unit time more than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, for example, in the general open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the open state. In addition, a securing period secured for the next public power opening lottery to be held after one public power opening lottery is performed (for example, is executed on the general drawing display unit 38a based on winning a prize in the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display periods are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reservation period is easier to select or the average reservation period is shorter than the low-frequency support mode. May be good. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening period is lengthened, and the securing period secured when one public power opening lottery is held and then the next public power opening lottery is held is shortened. The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced by applying any one of the conditions or any combination of the conditions of shortening the average period and increasing the winning probability.

When the normal power open state is won in the general power open lottery using the normal power random number counter C4, the normal power open state is set. The public electric open state ends when the general electric accessory 34a is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, or when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls win a prize in the second operating port 34. Specifically, regarding these contents, the upper limit number is 10 in common in both the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, the number of times of opening and closing of the utility object 34a is one in the low-frequency support mode, whereas it is more than one in the high-frequency support mode, which is more specific than in the low-frequency support mode. It is 3 times. Further, the duration of one opening of the Fuden accessory 34a is 1 second in the low frequency support mode, whereas it is 2 seconds in the high frequency support mode.

Next, the hit random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball wins the first operating port 33, it is stored in the first special figure holding area 125 of the special figure holding area 122, and the game ball is stored in the second operating port 34. It is stored in the second special figure holding area 126 of the special figure holding area 122 at the timing of winning a prize. Then, the winning / failing determination is performed using the value of the stored hit random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that is won in the winning / failing determination is stored in the main ROM 63 as a winning / failing table. In the hit / fail table, a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set as the hit / miss result. The jackpot result is a win / fail result that can trigger a shift to the open / close execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open / close, and can also trigger a shift to at least one of the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode. The small hit result is a win / fail result that does not trigger a shift in both the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode, while it triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open / close. The deviation result is a success / failure result that does not trigger a transition to the open / close execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode.

As the pass / fail table, there are a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode. That is, the pachinko machine 10 has the hold information on the first special drawing side acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 33 and the second special drawing side acquired based on the winning of the second operating port 34. The same winning / failing table is referred to in the hold information, and in any case, there are a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery.

To explain each hit / fail table in detail, the hit / fail table for the low probability mode has two random number values (for example, "5" and "305") that result in a big hit, and the random number values that result in a small hit. Is 3 (for example, "55", "355", "555"). Other than that, it is a random number value that results in a deviation.

In the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, the number of random numbers that result in big hits is set to be larger than that in the hit / fail table for the low probability mode, and specifically, 20 (for example, "5", "34", "65", "130", "163", "192", "220", "245", "276", "305", "334", "365", "392", "420" , "470", "495", "520", "558", "575", "599"). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. On the other hand, the value of the random number that is the result of the small hit is the same as in the case of the hit / fail table for the low probability mode.

If the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and values of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, the jackpot result is obtained. The value group of the winning random number counter C1 may or may not be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the high probability mode. ..

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99 and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when the game ball wins the first operating port 33, it is stored in the first special figure holding area 125 of the special figure holding area 122, and the game ball is stored in the second operating port 34. It is stored in the second special figure holding area 126 of the special figure holding area 122 at the timing of winning a prize. Then, the distribution determination is performed using the value of the stored jackpot type counter C2.

Here, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set in the pachinko machine 10, and each of these jackpot results includes (1) the contents of the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the contents of the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and ( 3) At least one of the three contents of the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is different.

The open / close execution mode executed when the jackpot is won is the round number regulation mode as described above. In the round number regulation mode, the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode are set so that the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high or low. And are set. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of one-time opening mode of the special electric winning device 32 are set with different opening durations from the opening to the closing of the special electric winning device 32. .. In detail, a long-term mode in which the opening duration is set to 29 seconds, which is a long period, and a short-term mode in which the opening duration is set to 0.5 seconds, which is a period shorter than the above-mentioned long time, are set. Has been done.

In the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by a player, the gaming area has a firing cycle of 100 per minute, 90 per minute, 80 per minute, or 70 per minute. The game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched toward the PA. The shortest firing cycle is 0.6 seconds and the longest firing cycle is about 0.86 seconds. In addition, the maximum number of end conditions for round games is set to 10. Then, in the long-term mode of the above-mentioned opening modes, the opening duration is set for a time longer than the product of the longest firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game. On the other hand, in the short-term aspect, the opening is continued for a time shorter than the product of the shortest firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game, more specifically, for a time shorter than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball. The period is set. Therefore, when the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a long-term mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will be awarded the maximum number of prizes in one round game, and the special electric winning device 32 is expected to win a prize for a short period of time. When the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in the embodiment, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will not be won. The open duration of the short-term mode may be the same as or substantially the same as the shortest firing cycle of the game ball, which is longer than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball (that is, the first cycle) and is the longest of the game ball. It may be a period shorter than the firing cycle (that is, the fourth cycle) of.

In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game according to the long-term mode. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game in a short-term mode.

The number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the maximum number of pieces in one round game are those in the high-frequency winning mode. Is not limited to the above values and is arbitrary as long as the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is higher than that of the low frequency winning mode. Is.

The open / close execution mode executed when a small hit is won is the open / close number regulation mode as described above. In the open / close number regulation mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened twice in a short-term mode. In this case, the maximum number of end conditions of the open / close number specified mode is set to 10, and the total open duration of the open / close number specified mode is the shortest firing cycle of the game ball and the maximum number of open / closed number specified modes. It is set to a shorter time than the product of. Therefore, in the open / close number specified mode, the round game is not executed, and whether or not the number of winnings is the upper limit is determined by the total number of winnings in the opening / closing number specified mode. The probability that the opening and closing of will be executed increases.

The distribution destination of the type of the jackpot result with respect to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 63 as a distribution table. The contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b).

As shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the distribution table shows the types of jackpot results: 10R low accuracy jackpot result, 2R high accuracy jackpot result, 5R high accuracy jackpot result, and 10R. High accuracy jackpot result is set.

In the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, the open / close execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode in which 10 round games occur. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the low probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shift. This low-probability mode will at least continue until the next jackpot result and the resulting open / close execution mode. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode ends when the number of games has reached the end reference number of times (specifically, 80 times) set as the number of times of 1 or more after the transition. In this case, the low frequency support mode is set. The low-frequency support mode that has been transferred after the end of the high-frequency support mode results in a big hit, and continues until the transition to the open / close execution mode is performed. Regardless of which of the big hit result and the small hit result is triggered, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode in the open / close execution mode.

In the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, the open / close execution mode is a low-frequency winning mode in which two round games occur. In this opening / closing execution mode, the special electric winning device 32 cannot be expected to win a prize, so that the number of game balls to be paid out is substantially zero. Further, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shift. This high-probability mode will at least continue until the next jackpot result and the resulting open / close execution mode. Further, the support mode is the high frequency support mode if the mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode is the high frequency support mode, while the mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode is the low frequency support mode. These support modes will continue until the next big hit result and the resulting open / close execution mode.

The 5R high-accuracy jackpot result is a high-frequency winning mode in which the open / close execution mode generates five round games. Further, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shift. This high-probability mode will at least continue until the next jackpot result and the resulting open / close execution mode. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode will continue until the next jackpot result and the resulting open / close execution mode.

The 10R high-accuracy jackpot result is a high-frequency winning mode in which the opening / closing execution mode generates 10 round games. Further, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shift. This high-probability mode will at least continue until the next jackpot result and the resulting open / close execution mode. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode will continue until the next jackpot result and the resulting open / close execution mode.

As a distribution table, as shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b), it is used in determining the distribution of the reserved information on the first special drawing side acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 33. The distribution table for the first special drawing and the distribution table for the second special drawing used when determining the distribution of the reserved information on the second special drawing side acquired based on the winning of the second operating port 34. And are provided.

Explaining each distribution table in detail, as shown in FIG. 8A, the distribution table for the first special figure includes 10R low probability jackpot results and 10R low probability jackpot results as the types of jackpot results to be sorted. A 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, and a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result are set. In the distribution table for the first special figure, "0 to 39" corresponds to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, "40 to 59" corresponds to the 2R high accuracy jackpot result, and "60 to 79". Corresponds to the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, and "80-99" corresponds to the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result.

Here, when a small hit result is obtained, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed twice in a short-term mode. On the other hand, in the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, the mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the maximum number of times being two times, and in each round game, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed once in a short-term mode. That is, when either the 2R high-accuracy big hit result or the small hit result is obtained, the operation mode of the special electric winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode is apparently the same. Further, in the game times when these game results are obtained, although different stop results are displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the display area is set larger than that of the first special figure display unit 37a. In the symbol display device 41, the stop result is displayed in an indistinguishable manner. Specifically, in any of the above game results, the symbol display device 41 stops and displays a common symbol combination (for example, "3.4.1") on any of the effective lines. In addition, when a 2R high-probability jackpot result is obtained in the low-frequency support mode, the opening / closing execution mode when a small hit result is obtained based on a prize in the first operating port 33 during the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the result. The effect is executed in a manner indistinguishable from the above, and after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the effect indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode is not executed in the symbol display device 41 or the like, and the effect is sent to the first operating port 33. The effect is executed in the same manner as after the open / close execution mode when a small hit result is obtained based on the winning. In addition, the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the low frequency support mode in both the case where the 2R high accuracy big hit result is obtained and the case where the small hit result is obtained in the low frequency support mode. With the above configuration, for example, in the situation of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, when the open / close execution mode that becomes the low frequency winning mode or the open / close execution mode that becomes the open / close number specified mode occurs, the player , The game will be played while expecting that the mode will shift to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, and the interest of the game will be improved.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8B, the distribution table for the second special figure has 10R low accuracy jackpot results, 5R high accuracy jackpot results, and 10R high as the types of jackpot results to be sorted. A certain jackpot result is set. In the distribution table for the second special figure, "0 to 39" corresponds to the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, "40 to 59" corresponds to the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, and "60 to 99". Corresponds to the 10R high accuracy jackpot result.

The distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure have the same probability of becoming the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode when the jackpot is won. On the other hand, the probability of becoming the high-frequency winning mode in the open / close execution mode is higher in the distribution table for the second special figure than in the distribution table for the first special figure. More specifically, the distribution table for the first special figure can be in the low frequency winning mode, whereas the distribution table for the second special drawing cannot be in the low frequency winning mode. Furthermore, the distribution table for the second special figure has a higher probability of shifting to the open / close execution mode in which the round game in the high frequency winning mode occurs 10 times than the distribution table for the first special figure. Therefore, as a type of jackpot result that can be selected when a jackpot is won, a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 rather than a prize in the first operating port 33 and an internal lottery is performed. It is more advantageous for the player when the internal lottery is performed.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is a symbol display device 41 that includes a symbol display device 41 capable of displaying variable symbols, and in a game machine in which a final stop result is given as a result of a game that results in a predetermined jackpot. This is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state in which the stop result is derived and displayed after the start of the variable display of the symbol in the above. Specifically, regarding the grant correspondence result, the combination of symbols with the same number on any of the effective lines is stopped and displayed. There are two types of expected effects, reach display and notice effect.

In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying a part of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in that state. A display state in which a variable display of symbols is performed in a symbol string is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a reach effect. , The combination of the reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect.

In the advance notice effect, after the variable display of the symbol is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, a situation or reach display in which the symbol is variablely displayed in a plurality of symbol rows in a part of the symbol rows is displayed. In the practice, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. In addition, the background screen has a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice effect can occur in both the game times when the big hit result is obtained and when the big hit result is not obtained, but the case where the big hit result is obtained has a higher probability than the case where the big hit result is not obtained. It is set.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times when the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the game times corresponding to the 2R high accuracy big hit result and the small hit result in which the combination of the same symbols is not stopped and displayed, the reach display is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the deviation result, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the main ROM 63 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. If so, the reach display is executed.

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform the advance notice effect is performed not by the main MPU 62 but by the sound light side MPU 82. In this case, in the sound light side MPU 82, the lottery process of the advance notice effect is executed so that the game times corresponding to the jackpot result are more likely to generate the advance notice effect than the game times corresponding to the missed result. By the way, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS determines the variation duration of the game times (the variation duration in the first special symbol display unit 37a or the second special symbol display unit 37b, the fluctuation duration of the symbol in the symbol display device 41) on the main MPU 62. It is used to do. Specifically, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS determines the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation display on the first special symbol display unit 37a or the second special symbol display unit 37b and at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. Obtained at the time.

<Regarding the prerequisite processing configuration for the main MPU 62>
Next, each process executed to advance the game on the main MPU 62 will be described. The processing of the main MPU 62 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S101, the power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is started. In the following step S102, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the main MPU 62 is set.

After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply / firing control device 78 is manually operated, and in the following step S105, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 64. Judge whether or not. Further, in step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in the following step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. judge.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality of the data stored and retained by the checksum is confirmed, the process proceeds to step S108 in the same manner. In step S108, the main RAM 64 is cleared as the initialization of the main RAM 64. After that, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, step S109 is performed without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 64 such as initialization of the power failure flag is set as an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is issued to the voice emission control device 80 in order to recognize the current gaming state. Send to.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S110 to S113. That is, the main MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt processing, but the remaining time is generated between the timer interrupt processing of one and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, and the residual processing of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 10). In the following step S111, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S112, the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 64, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S113, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the process of steps S110 to S113 is repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing on the main MPU 62 will be described. The main control board 61 is provided with a clock circuit as a pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and is further divided so as to exist in the middle of the signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 62. A peripheral circuit is provided.

The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing means for changing the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the main MPU 62. .. That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 62 at intervals of 4 msec, which is a specific period. The main MPU 62 executes a process for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as a rising edge or a falling edge of the pulse signal, and activates a timer interrupt process on the condition that the occurrence of a specific signal form is confirmed as at least one condition. And execute.

In this case, if the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in a situation where the activation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer changes from the state in which the interrupt is prohibited to the state in which the interrupt is permitted. Interrupt processing is started. That is, depending on the processing execution status of the main MPU 62, the next timer interrupt processing may be started after 4.1 msec has elapsed from the start of the previous timer interrupt processing, and when such an event occurs, the next timer interrupt processing may be started. The next timer interrupt processing will be started after 3.9 msec has elapsed from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt processing.

However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency divider circuit is performed in a specific cycle such as 4 msec regardless of the progress of the process in the main MPU 62, the timer interrupt process is basically started in the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 62 is next to the predetermined timing even if the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started. The timer interrupt processing at the timing of is absorbed by the amount exceeding the specific cycle, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

By the way, in the timer interrupt process, first, the power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 65, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, the power failure processing is executed.

In the following step S202, the lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing a process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal electric random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information. Executes the process of overwriting the read source counter. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

In the following step S205, fraud detection processing for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 64 by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred.

In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special electric is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the utility accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the utility should be started and the state should be switched to the closed state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S208, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the following step S209, the winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, the signals received from the winning detection sensors 66a to 66e are read, and the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are connected. Execute a process to specify the presence or absence of a ball.

In the following step S210, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 64 is executed. In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are aggregated. It may be configured.

In the following step S211, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. The processing content of the launch control process will be described in detail later.

In the following step S212, as the input state monitoring process, the disconnection confirmation of the winning detection sensors 66a to 66e and the opening confirmation of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are confirmed based on the information read in the reading process of step S208. Do.

In the following step S213, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed. The processing content of the special figure special electric control process will be described in detail later.

In the following step S214, the Fuzu Fuden control process is executed. In the Fuzu Fuden control process, when a prize is won in the through gate 35, a process for acquiring the numerical information of the Fuden random number counter C4 as the hold information on the Fuzu side is executed. In addition, when the hold information on the normal map side is acquired in a situation where the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a is not performed and the normal electric accessory 34a is not in the open state. Uses the reserved information on the side of the normal map to perform a public power open lottery and start the variable display on the normal map display unit 38a. The fluctuation display is performed for a predetermined period, and then the stop result corresponding to the result of the public electric open lottery is displayed. Then, in the case where the normal power open state is won in the public power open lottery, the stop result corresponding to the general power open state winning is displayed on the normal power display unit 38a, and then the normal power open state is set. The object 34a is opened in a predetermined mode (that is, the second operating port 34 is opened in a predetermined mode). If the support mode is a low-frequency support mode, the above-mentioned general-purpose open lottery, display control of the general-purpose map display unit 38a, and the general-purpose open state are performed in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, and the support mode is set. If it is a high-frequency support mode, it is performed in a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. In the open / close execution mode, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode regardless of the type of the support mode before the open / close execution mode is started and the type of the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease in the number of reserved information related to the first special figure display unit 37a on the first special figure reservation display unit 37c. Setting, setting of output information to reflect the increase / decrease number of hold information related to the second special figure display unit 37b to the second special figure hold display unit 37d, and the increase / decrease number of hold information related to the general figure display unit 38a. Figure Set the output information to be reflected in the hold display unit 38b. Further, in step S215, output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214. , Set the output information for updating the display contents of the general map display unit 38a. Further, in step S215, output information for updating the display contents of the round display unit 39 is set based on the processing result of the immediately preceding step S213.

In the following step S216, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed. Further, in step S217, when the game ball should be paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. The payout output process for setting the prize ball command as the output target in order to execute the payout of the game ball is executed. In the following step S218, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after the processes of steps S207 to S218 are executed, the timer interrupt process ends.

<Launch control process>
Next, the firing control process executed in step S211 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not a condition satisfying signal is received from the launch control unit 78c of the power supply / launch control device 78 (step S301). As described above, the launch control unit 78c receives a signal from the touch sensor 28a indicating that the operation handle 29b is being touched by the player, and a signal indicating that the launch stop switch is not manually operated by the player. Is transmitted from the push sensor 28b on condition that the signal is received from the push sensor 28b. When the condition satisfaction signal is not received (step S301: NO), the cycle measurement counter 64a (see FIG. 6) provided in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S302). The cycle measurement counter 64a is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not the firing cycle has elapsed in a situation where the condition satisfying signal is received from the firing control unit 78c.

When the condition condition signal is received (step S301: YES), the value of the cycle measurement counter 64a of the main RAM 64 is added by 1 (step S303). Then, whether or not the value of the cycle measurement counter 64a after the addition of 1 is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the current firing cycle stored in the firing cycle area 64b (see FIG. 6) provided in the main RAM 64. (Step S304). As described above, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of firing cycles, specifically, the first cycle capable of firing 100 game balls per minute, and 90 game balls per minute. The second cycle, which enables the firing of 80 gaming balls, and the fourth cycle, which enables the firing of 70 gaming balls per minute, are set. There is. Information corresponding to any of the first to fourth cycles is stored in the firing cycle area 64b.

When the value of the cycle measurement counter 64a is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the current firing cycle stored in the firing cycle area 64b (step S304: YES), a pulsed firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c (step S304: YES). Step S305). When the launch control unit 78c receives the pulse-shaped launch instruction signal from the MPU 62, the launch control unit 78c drives and controls the game ball launch mechanism 27 once. In this case, if the game ball is continuously supplied to the game ball launch mechanism 27, one game ball is launched toward the game area PA in the launch cycle measured by the main MPU 62. To. Further, at the time of this firing, since the firing intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c, the game ball is launched with the intensity corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b.

When the process of step S302 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S304, or when the process of step S305 is executed, the cycle setting process is executed (step S306). Although the details of the cycle setting process will be described later, a process for storing information corresponding to any of the first to fourth cycles is executed in the firing cycle area 64b.

<Special figure special electric control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control process executed in step S213 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure special electric control process, a process for acquiring the hold information on the special figure side is executed when a prize is generated in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, and the special figure side is held. When the information is stored, a hit / fail judgment is made for the reserved information on the special figure side, and a process for causing the game rotation operation is executed with the hit / fail judgment as an opportunity. Further, based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the process of shifting to the open / close execution mode is executed after the end of the game rotation operation, and the processes during the open / close execution mode and at the end of the open / close execution mode are executed.

Specifically, first, the pending information acquisition process is executed (step S401). In the acquisition process, when a game ball is won in the first operating port 33, the number of reserved information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is read out, and the number thereof is read out. When the number of reserved information is less than the upper limit value (specifically, "4"), each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set in the first special figure holding area 125. The reserved information on the first special drawing side is stored in the uppermost area where the reserved information is not stored. Further, in the acquisition process, when a game ball is won in the second operating port 34, the number of reserved information on the second special figure side stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is read out. , When the number of reserved information is less than the upper limit value (specifically, "4"), each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set to the second special figure holding area 126. Of these, the reserved information on the second special drawing side is stored in the uppermost area where the reserved information is not stored.

In the acquisition process, when the hold information on the first special figure side or the hold information on the second special figure side is acquired, the hold command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. The sound light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the received hold command to the display side MPU 92. By receiving the hold command, the display side MPU 92 changes the display of the number of hold information on the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold information. In this case, since the hold command includes information indicating which of the hold information on the first special figure side and the hold information on the second special figure side has increased, the number is increased in the symbol display device 41. The display of the number of held items corresponding to the side that has been held is changed.

Further, when the number of hold information increases as described above, in the display control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), the first special figure hold display unit 37c and the second special figure hold display unit 37c Display control is performed on the side of 37d corresponding to the increase in the number of holds so that the display content is changed to correspond to the increase in the number of holds.

In the following step S402, the information of the special figure special electric counter provided in the main RAM 64 is read, and in step S403, the special figure special electric address table stored in the main ROM 63 is read. Then, in step S404, the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table.

As described above, the special figure special electric control process includes a process for controlling the effect for the game round and a process for controlling the open / close execution mode. As the process for controlling the effect for the game round, the special figure variation start process (step S406), which is the process for starting the effect for the game round, and the process for advancing the effect for the game round. The special figure changing process (step S407) and the special figure finalizing process (step S408), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, are set.

The processes for controlling the open / close execution mode are the special electric start process (step S409), which is a process for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode, and the process for controlling the open state of the special electric winning device 32. The special electric power opening process (step S410), the special electric power closing process (step S411) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric power winning device 32, the ending of the open / close execution mode, and the game at the end of the open / close execution mode. The special electric power termination process (step S412), which is a process for controlling the transition of the state, is set.

The special figure special electric counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed. In the special figure special electric address table, the start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter.

The special figure special electric counter controls the special figure special electric power in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. 1 addition, 2 addition, 1 subtraction or "0" is cleared corresponding to the processing executed in the processing. Therefore, in the special figure special electric control processing in each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the processing according to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric counter. The special figure special electric counter is set to 0 as an initial value.

After executing the process of step S404, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in the step S404 is executed (step S405). Specifically, when the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure change start process in step S406, and when the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure change process in step S407. If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure determination process in step S408, and if the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special electric start process in step S409, and the acquired start address is If it is SA4, it jumps to the processing during opening of the special electric power in step S410, if the acquired start address is SA5, it jumps to the processing during closing of the special electric power of step S411, and if the acquired start address is SA6. Jump to the special electric termination process in step S412. When any of the processes of steps S406 to S412 is executed, the special figure special electric control process is terminated. Hereinafter, the processes of steps S406 to S412 will be described individually.

<Special figure fluctuation start processing>
First, the special figure variation start processing in step S406 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not the reserved information on the special figure side is stored in either the first special figure holding area 125 or the second special drawing holding area 126 (step S501). If a negative determination is made in step S501, the present special figure fluctuation start process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S501, the process proceeds to step S502 to execute the data setting process.

In the data setting process, it is first determined whether or not the number of reserved information on the second special drawing side is "0". When the number of holds in the second special figure holding area 126 is "0", the data setting process for the first special figure is executed, and when the number of holds in the second special figure holding area 126 is 1 or more, the data setting process is executed. The data setting process for the second special figure is executed.

As described above, the case where the data setting process is executed is a case where the reserved information on the special figure side is stored in either the first special figure holding area 125 or the second special figure holding area 126. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved figures in the second special figure holding area 126 is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, the reserved information on the second special figure side is stored. If so, the hold information on the second special figure side is set as the start target of the game round regardless of whether or not the number of hold information on the first special figure side is 1 or more. As a result, when the reserved information on the special figure side is stored in both the first special figure holding area 125 and the second special drawing holding area 126, the second special drawing side corresponding to the second operating port 34 The hold information will be prioritized as the start target of the game round.

In the data setting process for the first special figure, first, the data stored in the first area 125a of the first special figure holding area 125 is moved to the execution area 127 for the special figure. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure holding area 125 is executed. In this data shift process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 2nd area 125b → 1st area 125a, 3rd area 125c → 2nd area 125b, 4th area 125d → 3rd area 125c, and then the 4th area. Area 125d is cleared to "0".

After that, the second special figure flag provided in the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0". The second special figure flag is a flag for specifying whether the start of the variation display this time is the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. After that, a shift command is output, which is information for causing the sound / light side MPU 82 to recognize that the data in the first special figure holding area 125 has been shifted, and the data setting process is terminated. By transmitting the command corresponding to the received shift command to the display side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 82 displays the number of hold information corresponding to the first special figure hold area 125 in the symbol display device 41. Change in response to the decrease. Further, when the number of hold information in the first special figure hold area 125 decreases as described above, the display control process in step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) determines the first special figure hold display unit 37c. On the other hand, the display control is performed so that the display content is changed according to the decrease in the number of pending items.

In the data setting process for the second special figure, first, the data stored in the first area 126a of the second special figure holding area 126 is moved to the execution area 127 for the special figure. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 126 is executed. In this data shift process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the second area 126b → the first area 126a, the third area 126c → the second area 126b, the fourth area 126d → the third area 126c, and then the fourth area. Area 126d is cleared to "0".

After that, "1" is set in the second special figure flag provided in the main RAM 64. After that, a shift command is output, which is information for causing the sound / light side MPU 82 to recognize that the data in the second special figure holding area 126 has been shifted, and this data setting process is terminated. By transmitting the command corresponding to the received shift command to the display side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 82 displays the number of hold information corresponding to the second special figure hold area 126 in the symbol display device 41. Change in response to the decrease. Further, when the number of hold information in the second special figure hold area 126 decreases as described above, the display control process in step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) determines the second special figure hold display unit 37d. On the other hand, the display control is performed so that the display content is changed according to the decrease in the number of pending items.

After executing the data setting process (step S502), the hit / fail determination process is executed (step S503). In the winning / failing determination process, it is first determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, the hit / fail table for the high probability mode provided in the main ROM 63 is referred to, and among the information stored in the execution area 127 for the special figure, the information for the hit / fail judgment, that is, the winning random number It is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the counter C1 matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. Further, in the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 127 for the special figure is referred to by referring to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode provided in the main ROM 63. Judges whether or not matches the jackpot numerical information for low probability.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is a jackpot result (step S504: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S505). In the distribution determination process, by determining whether or not "1" is set in the second special figure flag of the main RAM 64, the current game times are held information on the first special figure side and the second special figure. It is determined which of the pending information on the side corresponds to. Then, the distribution table corresponding to the determination result is the distribution table for the first special figure (see FIG. 8 (a)) and the distribution table for the second special figure (see FIG. 8 (b)). Select from. After selecting the distribution table, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2, among the hold information stored in the execution area 127 for the special figure, is the selected distribution. Understand which type of jackpot result is supported in the minute table. Specifically, when the distribution table for the first special figure is selected, any of the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, the 2R high accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, and the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is selected. Understand whether it corresponds to the result. In addition, when the distribution table for the second special figure is selected, it is possible to grasp which of the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, and the 10R high accuracy jackpot result corresponds to. To do.

After that, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S506). Specifically, the jackpot result in which the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b in this game is stored in the main ROM 63 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for use, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 64. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the jackpot result. In step S506, information on the mode of the pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in step S505 is stored in the main RAM 64.

The information on the type of the pattern to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern modes may be set for each jackpot result.

After that, the flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S507). Specifically, the main RAM 64 is provided with flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, and in step S507, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, the distribution determination result in step S505 is used. Set "1" to the corresponding flag.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is a small hit result (step S508: YES), the stop result setting process for the small hit result is executed (step S509). Specifically, in this game, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is stored in the main ROM 63 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for the result, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 64. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result. After that, "1" is set in the small hit flag provided in the main RAM 64 (step S510).

If the result of the hit / fail determination process is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result, the stop result setting process for the miss result is executed (step S511). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b in this game is stored in the main ROM 63 in advance. It is specified from the stop result table for use, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 64. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the big hit result and the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the small hit result.

After executing any of the processes of step S507, step S510, and step S511, the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration period is executed (step S512). The execution period of the game round is the fluctuation continuation period, which is the period from the start of the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 to the start of the static display of each symbol, and the execution period of each symbol. It is composed of a final stop period, which is a period from the start of the static display to the end of the static display. In the variable continuation period acquisition process, a process for determining the variable continuation period among the execution periods of the game times to be started this time is executed. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation continuation period.

When the current hit / fail judgment result is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S601: YES), the current hit / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result trigger the execution of the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode. It is determined whether or not the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c (see FIG. 6) provided in the main RAM 64 is equal to or higher than the third reference value in either the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result. (Step S602). The total number of rounds counter 64c is executed in the low-frequency support mode after the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs in the normal game state, which is the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode. This is a counter for the main MPU 62 to grasp the total number of round games in the open / close execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode that occurred without any problems. The third reference value is the reference value of the largest number among the reference values set for a plurality of types, and is specifically "60". The total number of rounds counter 64c and the third reference value will be described in detail later.

If the hit / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result are either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result and the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S602: YES). , The longest period among the fluctuation continuation periods of the plurality of types of game times set in the pachinko machine 10 is selected as the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times (step S604). That is, if the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is less than the third reference value for either the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, the process of step S604 is not executed. Further, even if the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value, if this time is either a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, a 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, or a small hit result, the process of step S604 is executed. Not done. When the process of step S604 is executed, after transmitting the variation command including the information of the longest period and the type command including the current pass / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S615). ), The period adjustment process is executed (step S616).

If this time is neither the 10R low accuracy jackpot result nor the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, or if the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is less than the third reference value (step S602: NO), the hit time period from the main ROM 63 Read the table (step S603). The hit period table includes the first hit period table selected when either the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, and the 2R high accuracy jackpot result and the 2R high accuracy jackpot result. It includes a second hit time period table that is selected if it is one of the small hit results.

In the first hit time period table, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical ranges of "0 to 198" of the variable type counter CS so as not to overlap each other, and each of these groups has its own set. On the other hand, information on the fluctuation duration of the game times is set. That is, in the first hit period table, there are a plurality of types so that the fluctuation duration of the game times, which is either the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, is relatively long or short. It is set, and each of the fluctuation type counter CSs of "0 to 198" is assigned to one of the plurality of types of fluctuation durations. By collating the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step S614, which will be described later, with the first hit time period table, the information of the fluctuation duration corresponding to the numerical information is changed in the current game times. Obtained as duration information.

In the first hit time period table, a fluctuation duration longer than the fluctuation duration set in the second hit time period table, the normal use period table and the shortening period table described later is set. Therefore, the fluctuation duration of the game times that is either the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is the fluctuation duration of the game times that is either the 2R high accuracy jackpot result or the small hit result. , And the fluctuation duration may be longer than the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the reach display does not occur. In addition, the average fluctuation duration according to the first per hour table is the average fluctuation duration according to the second per hour table, the average fluctuation duration according to the normal period table described later, and the average according to the shortening period table. The period is longer than the fluctuation duration of. Therefore, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times, which is either the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, is one of the 2R high accuracy jackpot result and the small hit result. The fluctuation duration is longer than the average period of the fluctuation duration and the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the reach display does not occur.

The fluctuation duration set in the first hit time period table is the same as the fluctuation duration set in the reach hour period table described later. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not a jackpot result is obtained after the reach display from the fluctuation duration of the game times. However, it is not limited to this, and a part of the fluctuation duration set in the first per hour period table is longer than any of all the fluctuation durations set in the reach hour period table. It may be configured to be. In this case, there is a fluctuation duration of the game times in which the occurrence of the jackpot result is confirmed. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the first hit time period table is longer than the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the reach time period table described later. Therefore, the game times that are either the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result continue to fluctuate more than the game times of the off-reach display that does not result in a jackpot after the reach display. The period tends to be long. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the first per hour table is the same as or abbreviated as the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the reach time table described later. It may be the same.

Here, the longest period acquired in step S604 is longer than the longest fluctuation duration among the fluctuation durations set in the first per hour period table. That is, the longest period acquired in step S604 is longer than any of the variable durations of the game times selected in other situations. Therefore, when this time is either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result and the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the fluctuation duration of the game times is the longest period. ..

In the second hit-time period table, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical ranges of "0 to 198" of the variable type counter CS so as not to overlap each other, and each of these groups has its own set. On the other hand, information on the fluctuation duration of the game times is set. That is, in the second hit time period table, a plurality of types are set so that the fluctuation duration of the game times, which is either the 2R high accuracy big hit result or the small hit result, is relatively long or short. Each of the variation type counters CS of "198" is assigned to one of the plurality of types of variation durations. By collating the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step S614 described later with the second hit time period table, the information of the fluctuation duration corresponding to the numerical information is changed in the current game times. Obtained as duration information.

In the second hit time period table, a fluctuation duration longer than the fluctuation duration set in the normal period table and the shortening period table, which will be described later, is set. Therefore, the fluctuation duration of the game times, which is either the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result or the small hit result, can be a longer fluctuation duration than the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the reach display does not occur. In addition, the average fluctuation duration according to the second per-hour period table is longer than the average fluctuation duration according to the normal period table and the average fluctuation duration according to the shortening period table, which will be described later. Therefore, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times, which is either the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result or the small hit result, is longer than the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the reach display does not occur.

When the hit / fail determination result this time is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S601: NO), it is determined whether or not a missed reach display occurs in the current game round (step S605). Specifically, among the information stored in the execution area 127 for special figures, the information for reach determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the main ROM 63 in advance for the reach occurrence determination table. Judges whether or not it matches the numerical information set in. When the out-of-reach display occurs in this game round (step S605: YES), the reach time period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S606).

In the reach time period table, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical ranges of "0 to 198" of the variable type counter CS so as not to overlap each other, and for each of these groups. Information on the fluctuation duration of the game times is set. That is, in the reach time period table, a plurality of types are set so that the fluctuation duration of the game times that is displayed as an out-of-reach is relatively long and short, and each of the fluctuation type counters CS of "0 to 198" is set. It is assigned to one of these multiple variable durations. By collating the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step S614 described later with the reach time period table, the information of the fluctuation duration corresponding to the numerical information is the fluctuation duration of the current game. It is acquired as information of.

In the reach time period table, a fluctuation duration longer than the fluctuation duration set in the second hit time period table, the normal period table and the shortening period table, which will be described later, is set. Therefore, the fluctuation duration of the game times that is displayed as an off-reach is longer than the fluctuation duration of the game times that is either the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result or the small hit result, and the fluctuation duration of the game times that the reach display does not occur. It can be a variable duration. In addition, the average fluctuation duration according to the reach hourly period table is the average fluctuation duration according to the second per hourly period table, the average fluctuation duration according to the normal use period table described later, and the average fluctuation according to the shortening period table. It will be longer than the duration. Therefore, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times that is the off-reach display is the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times that is either the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result or the small hit result, and the game times that the reach display does not occur. The fluctuation duration is longer than the average duration of the fluctuation duration. On the other hand, the fluctuation duration set in the reach time period table is the same as the fluctuation duration set in the first hit time period table as already explained, and the game times by the reach time period table. As already explained, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game is shorter than the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the first per-hour period table.

If the out-of-reach display does not occur in this game round (step S605: NO), the current support is achieved by determining whether or not "1" is set in the high-frequency support flag provided in the main RAM 64. It is determined whether or not the mode is the high frequency support mode (step S607). The high frequency support flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and the high frequency support mode is the situation where "1" is set in the high frequency support flag. The low frequency support mode is the situation where the high frequency support flag is "0".

In the high-frequency support mode (step S607: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved information on the second special figure side stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is 3 or more (step S607: YES). Step S608). In the high-frequency support mode, as described above, the frequency with which the utility object 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened is relatively high per unit time, so that the hold information on the second special drawing side is acquired. It will be easier. Further, as already explained, the hold information on the second special figure side has priority over the hold information on the first special figure side as the start target of the game round. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the period table referred to for determining the fluctuation duration of the game times is changed according to the number of the reserved information on the second special figure side stored. ..

When the number of reserved information on the second special drawing side is less than two (step S608: NO), the normal period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S609). In the normal period table, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical ranges of "0 to 198" of the variable type counter CS so as not to overlap each other, and a game is set for each of these groups. Information on the duration of fluctuations is set. That is, in the normal period table, a plurality of types are set so that the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the hit result is not obtained and the reach display does not occur is relatively long and short, and the fluctuation type of "0 to 198" is set. Each of the counter CSs is assigned to one of these plurality of variable durations. By collating the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step S614, which will be described later, with the normal period table, the information of the fluctuation duration corresponding to the numerical information is the fluctuation duration of the current game. Obtained as information.

When the number of reserved information on the second special drawing side is two or more (step S608: YES), the shortening period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S610). In the shortening period table, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical ranges of "0 to 198" of the variable type counter CS so as not to overlap each other, and a game is set for each of these groups. Information on the duration of fluctuations is set. That is, in the shortening period table, a plurality of types are set so that the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the hit result is not obtained and the reach display does not occur is relatively long and short, and the fluctuation type of "0 to 198" is set. Each of the counter CSs is assigned to one of these plurality of variable durations. By collating the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step S614, which will be described later, with the shortening period table, the information of the fluctuation duration corresponding to the numerical information is the fluctuation duration of the current game. Obtained as information.

The shortened period table includes a variable duration table that is shorter than the variable duration set in other period tables, including the normal period table. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, in the situation where two or more hold information on the second special figure side is held and stored, if the game round is started without a hit result and the reach display does not occur, another situation. The fluctuation duration of the game times can be shorter than that of the fluctuation duration. In addition, the average fluctuation duration of the shortened period table is shorter than the average fluctuation duration of other period tables including the normal period table. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, in the situation where two or more hold information on the second special figure side is held and stored, if the game round is started without a hit result and the reach display does not occur, another situation. The average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times is shorter than that.

In the low frequency support mode (step S607: NO), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is 3 or more (step S607: NO). Step S611). In the low-frequency support mode, as described above, the frequency with which the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened is relatively low per unit time, so that the hold information on the second special drawing side is acquired. It becomes difficult, and it becomes easier to acquire the hold information on the first special figure side than the hold information on the second special figure side. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the period table referred to for determining the fluctuation duration of the game times is changed according to the number of the reserved information on the first special figure side stored. ..

When the number of reserved information on the 1st special drawing side is less than 3 (step S611: NO), the normal period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S612), and the 1st special drawing side When the number of hold information stored on hold is 3 or more (step S611: YES), the shortening period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S613). The contents of these normal period tables and shortened period tables have already been described.

As already explained, the shortened period table has a variable duration shorter than the variable duration set in other period tables including the normal period table. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, in the situation where three or more hold information on the first special figure side is held and stored, if the game round is started without a hit result and no reach display occurs, another situation. The fluctuation duration of the game times can be shorter than that of the fluctuation duration. In addition, as already explained, the average fluctuation duration of the shortened period table is shorter than the average fluctuation duration of other period tables including the normal period table. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, in the situation where three or more hold information on the first special figure side is held and stored, if the game round is started without a hit result and the reach display does not occur, another situation. The average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times is shorter than that.

When the hit time period table is read in step S603, when the reach time period table is read in step S606, when the normal time period table is read in step S609, the shortening period table is read in step S610. When read, when the normal period table is read in step S612, or when the shortened period table is read in step S613, the period acquisition process is executed (step S614). In the period acquisition process, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is acquired. Then, by collating the acquired numerical information of the variation type counter CS with the period table read out as described above, the variation continuation period of the current game times is acquired.

When the process of step S604 is executed, or when the process of step S614 is executed, a change command including information on the change duration of the game times acquired this time, and a type including the result of this hit / fail judgment and the result of distribution judgment The command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S615). After that, the period adjustment process is executed (step S616). The period adjustment process will be described in detail later.

The fluctuation command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the hit / fail judgment processing, data corresponding to the result of the distribution judgment processing, and the fluctuation duration of the game times. The data corresponding to is included. Specifically, the upper 4 bits of the 2 bytes of data are used to set identification data to indicate that the command is a variable command, and the next 4 bits of data are used to determine whether or not the data is correct. And the lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination processing is set, and the holding information of either the 1st special figure holding area 125 or the 2nd special figure holding area 126 is set by the next 1-bit data. Trigger data indicating whether or not it is a trigger is set, and time data corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the game times is set from the remaining 7-bit data. Therefore, when the sound / light side MPU 82 receives the variation command, it recognizes that it is the variation command from the identification data, and obtains the result of the hit / fail determination process and the result of the distribution determination process from the lottery result data. Recognize and recognize the fluctuation duration of this game from the above time data. Here, since the main MPU 62 selects a variation duration of the game times that differs depending on whether or not reach occurs, even if the variation command does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred, the sound light side. In the MPU 82, it is possible to specify the presence or absence of reach from the information on the fluctuation duration of the game times. In this respect, it can be said that the variable command contains information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. The variation command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

The type command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the hit / fail judgment process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution judgment process, and whether the mode is high probability. It includes data on whether or not it is in high-frequency support mode and data on whether or not it is in high-frequency support mode. Specifically, identification data for indicating that the command is a type command is set by the upper 4 bits of the 2 bytes of data, and the following 4 bits of the data are used for the pass / fail judgment process and The lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and the remaining 8-bit data is used to recognize the state of whether or not the mode is high probability mode and whether or not the mode is high frequency support mode. Is set. Therefore, when the sound / light side MPU 82 receives the type command, it recognizes that it is the type command from the identification data, and recognizes the result of the winning / failing determination process and the result of the distribution determination process from the lottery result data. , Whether or not it is a high probability mode and whether or not it is a high frequency support mode is recognized from the above state recognition data.

Both the variation command and the type command include data corresponding to the result of the hit / fail judgment process and the result of the distribution judgment process. Therefore, in the sound / light side MPU 82, by collating the lottery result data included in the variation command with the lottery result data included in the type command, noise or the like may be generated regarding the reception of the variation command and the type command. It is possible to identify whether or not a communication error has occurred. Then, when both lottery result data match, the control for production corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command is executed, and when both lottery result data do not match. Can notify it. By the way, in the latter case, the sound / light side MPU 82 may execute the game rotation operation corresponding to the communication abnormality in the game rotation. For example, in the game rotation operation, the hit / fail determination process and the distribution determination may be performed. Regardless of the result of the process, the symbol display device 41 may stop and display the combination of symbols corresponding to the complete detachment. In this case, the game rotation operation may be performed over the fluctuation continuation period corresponding to the time data included in the fluctuation command, or may be continued until the next fluctuation command and type command are received. May be good. It should be noted that the variation command may not include one of the data of the result of the hit / miss determination process and the result of the distribution determination process, or may have a configuration in which both data are not included.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), after executing the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process in step S512, the information on the fluctuation continuation period of the game times acquired in the change continuation period acquisition process is input. , Set to the special figure special electric timer counter provided in the main RAM 64 (step S513). The update of the numerical information set in the special figure special electric timer counter is executed in the timer update process (step S210) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10).

After that, among the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the display unit on the execution target side of the current game round starts the variable display of the pattern (step S514). After that, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S515). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation processing.

<Processing during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the process during the change of the special figure in step S407 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times has elapsed (step S701). When the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times has not elapsed (step S701: NO), the display update process is executed (step S702). In the display update process, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the pattern on the execution target side of the current game round is executed among the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. This regular change is continued until it is time to start the final stop display. In addition, this regular change is performed in a certain manner regardless of whether or not a hit result is obtained and whether or not a reach display occurs.

When the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times has elapsed (step S701: YES), the stop result display process is executed (step S703). In the display processing, among the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the display mode of the pattern on the execution target side of the current game round is set to the display mode corresponding to the result of the current game round. Specifically, at the start of the game round this time, the information of the stop result stored in the main RAM 64 is read in step S506, step S509 or step S511 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13), and the read stop is read. The pattern corresponding to the result information is continuously displayed on the execution target side of the current game times among the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. The display state of this pattern is continued until the next variable display of the pattern is started on the corresponding special figure display units 37a and 37b.

After that, the selection process of the final stop period is executed (step S704). As described above, the execution period of the game round is the fluctuation continuation period, which is the period from the start of the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 to the start of the static display of each symbol. It is composed of a final stop period, which is a period from the start of the static display of each symbol to the end of the static display. In step S704, the final suspension period, which is the latter period, is selected. Two types of periods, 0.5 seconds (first final stop period) and 3 seconds (second final stop period), are set for the pachinko machine 10 as the target period of the final stop period, and the final stop period can be selected. In the process, the side to be the final stop period of the current game round is selected from these two types of periods.

After that, the information of the final stop period of the game times selected in step S704 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S705). As a result, the measurement of the final stop period in this game round is started.

After that, a final stop command including information on the final stop period of the game times selected this time is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S706). By receiving the final stop command, the sound light side MPU 82 grasps the final stop period of this game round and starts measuring the final stop period, and also sends a command corresponding to the final stop period to the display side MPU 92 to perform a symbol. The display device 41 starts the static display of each symbol that is the result of stopping the game round this time. The static display will continue for the final stop period of this game.

After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S707). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process to the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process.

<Processing during special drawing confirmation>
Next, the process during special figure determination in step S408 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the final stop period of the current game round has elapsed (step S801). If a negative determination is made in step S801, the process of determining the special figure is terminated as it is.

When the final stop period of the current game round has passed (step S801: YES), the winning / failing judgment result that triggered the current game round is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S802: YES), execute the process for shifting to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, first, the selection process of the opening period is executed (step S803). The opening period is a period secured until the opening of the first special electric winning device 32 is started in the opening / closing execution mode, and during the opening period, the display / light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 perform opening / closing execution. An opening effect indicating that the mode is started is executed. Although the details will be described later, two types of the pachinko machine 10 are set as the target period of the opening period, 4 seconds (first opening period) and 10 seconds (second opening period), and the selection process of the opening period is set. Then, the side to be the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode of this time is selected from these two types of periods.

After that, the information of the opening period selected in step S803 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S804). As a result, the measurement of the opening period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time is started.

After that, an opening command including the information of the opening period selected this time is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S805). By receiving the opening command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode of this time and starts measuring the opening period, and displays the opening effect corresponding to the opening period of this time. The light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed in the part 54. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the opening effect corresponding to the current opening period.

After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S806). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process to the one corresponding to the special figure start process.

On the other hand, when the winning / failing judgment result that triggered the game round is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S802: NO), the high probability flag provided in the main RAM 64 is "0". By determining whether or not the high-frequency support flag is "1", it is a low-probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode triggered by the result of the 10R low-probability jackpot in the game times that ended this time. It is determined whether or not the game is executed in the situation of the high frequency support mode (step S807). The high probability flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery is the high probability mode, and the situation where "1" is set in the high probability flag is the high probability mode. There is a low probability mode in which the high probability flag is "0". Further, the high frequency support flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and the situation where "1" is set in the high frequency support flag is high frequency. It is a support mode, and the situation where the high frequency support flag is "0" is the low frequency support mode.

In the case of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (step S807: YES), the value of the game count counter provided in the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S808). The game count counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify the number of executions of the remaining game times in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. When the open / close execution mode ends with the result of the 10R low probability jackpot, the high probability flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" and the high frequency support flag of the main RAM 64 is set to "1". Is set, and further, the end reference number of times "80" is set in the game number counter of the main RAM 64.

After that, by determining whether or not the value of the game count counter after 1 subtraction is "0", was the end reference number of game times executed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode? It is determined whether or not (step S809). When the value of the game count counter is "0" (step S809: YES), the high frequency support flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S810). As a result, the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are set.

After that, the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S811). That is, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is not cleared to "0" when the high-frequency support mode is continued even if the high-probability mode is changed to the low-probability mode, but the high-frequency support mode is changed to the low-frequency support mode. "0" is cleared when the transition is made.

When a negative determination is made in step S807, a negative determination is made in step S809, or the process of step S811 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S812). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure determination processing to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

<Special electric start processing>
Next, the special electric start processing in step S409 in the special electric special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the opening time in the opening / closing execution mode of this time has elapsed (step S901). If a negative determination is made in step S901, the special electric train start process is terminated as it is.

When the opening period in the current opening / closing execution mode has elapsed (step S901: YES), the jackpot result is provided on the condition that the execution trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is one of the jackpot results (step S902: YES). Execute the time setting process.

In the setting process at the time of the big hit result, the value of the number of round games corresponding to the current big hit result is set in the round counter provided in the main RAM 64 (step S903). Specifically, if the jackpot result this time is a 2R high accuracy jackpot result, "2" is set in the round counter, and if the jackpot result this time is a 5R high accuracy jackpot result, the round counter is set. Set "5", and if the current jackpot result is a 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, set "10" in the round counter. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games by the main MPU 62 in the open / close execution mode.

After that, on condition that the current jackpot result is not a 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, that is, the current jackpot result is either a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, a 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result (step). S904: NO), the setting process for the round history counter provided in the main RAM 64 is executed (step S905). That is, the setting process is executed when the open / close execution mode which is the high frequency winning mode is executed, and is not executed when the open / close execution mode which is the low frequency winning mode is executed. Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, set "5" in the round history counter of the main RAM 64, and this jackpot result is a 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high-accuracy jackpot. If it is the result, "10" is set in the round history counter of the main RAM 64. The value set in the round history counter will be added to the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode this time, although details will be described later. By adding the value of the number of rounds executed in the current open / close execution mode to the total number of rounds counter 64c at the end of the open / close execution mode in this way, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c has already been executed. It is possible to make it the total number of times the game is executed.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S904, or when the process of step S905 is executed, "10" is set in the winning counter provided in the main RAM 64 (step S906). The winning counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not a winning of the maximum number of game balls has occurred in one round game or one opening / closing number regulation mode.

After that, the read processing of the open duration corresponding to the jackpot result is executed (step S907). Specifically, when the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, information on the opening continuation period corresponding to the short-term mode is read from the main ROM 63. The opening duration is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than the shortest firing cycle (0.6 seconds) of the game ball. On the other hand, if the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is either a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, a 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, the main ROM 63 corresponds to a long-term mode. The information of the opening duration (29 seconds) is read out.

On the other hand, when the current opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the small hit result (step S902: NO), the setting process at the time of the small hit result is executed. In the setting process at the time of the small hit result, "2" is set in the open / close counter provided in the main RAM 64 (step S908), and "10" is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 64 (step S909). The open / close counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed by the main MPU 62 in the open / close execution mode of the open / close number specified mode.

After that, the read processing of the open duration corresponding to the small hit result is executed (step S910). The opening duration is stored in advance in the main ROM 63, and specifically, it is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than the shortest firing cycle (0.6 seconds) of the game ball. The opening duration corresponding to the small hit result may be longer than the opening duration of the short-term mode and shorter than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball, and is the same as or the shortest firing cycle of the game ball. It may be substantially the same, and may be a period longer than the shortest firing cycle (that is, the first cycle) of the game ball and shorter than the longest firing cycle (that is, the fourth cycle) of the game ball.

When the process of step S907 or step S910 is executed, the read open continuation period information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S911). As a result, the measurement of the opening duration is started. The open duration is constant regardless of the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Further, the value of the upper limit number set in the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is also constant regardless of the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c. As a result, it is possible to prevent the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c from affecting the number of game balls paid out when the special electric winning device 32 is won in the opening / closing execution mode.

After that, the opening setting process for opening the special electric winning device 32 is executed (step S912). Further, a release command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S913). The release command is a command for causing the sound light side MPU 82 to recognize that the special electric winning device 32 is released. Upon receiving the release command, the sound / light side MPU 82 executes control for switching the effect of the display / light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 in the open / close execution mode accordingly.

After that, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S914). As a result, the value of the special electric power counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric power start processing to the one corresponding to the special electric power opening processing.

<Processing while the special electric power is open>
Next, the processing during opening of the special power in step S410 in the special power control processing (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the open monitoring process is executed (step S1001). In the open monitoring process, the value of the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 for one game ball winning in the special electric winning device 32, and the value of the winning counter after 1 subtraction is "0". It is determined that the closing condition has been met. Further, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied even when the value of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", that is, when the opening continuation period has elapsed.

When it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied as a result of the monitoring process during opening (step S1002: YES), the closing setting process for closing the special electric winning device 32 is executed (step S1003). In addition, the process of grasping the end condition is executed (step S1004). Specifically, if this time is the open / close execution mode triggered by one of the jackpot results, the value of the round counter of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1, and the value of the round counter after 1 subtraction is "0". It is determined that the end condition of the opening / closing execution mode of this time is satisfied. If the open / close execution mode is triggered by the small hit result, the open / close counter value of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1, and if the open / close counter value after 1 subtraction is "0", the open / close counter is opened / closed this time. It is determined that the end condition of the execution mode is satisfied. Further, if the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the small hit result, it is determined that the end condition of the opening / closing execution mode of this time is satisfied even when the value of the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is "0".

If the end condition of the open / close execution mode is not satisfied (step S1005: NO), the interval period selection process is executed (step S1006). The interval period is a period during which the special electric winning device 32 is maintained in the closed state between one opening time of the special electric winning device 32 and the next opening time. In the interval period, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit The effect corresponding to the interval period is executed in the 54 and the symbol display device 41. Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of periods, 2 seconds (first interval period) and 6 seconds (second interval period), which are subject to the interval period, and the interval period selection process is performed. Then, the side to be set as the current interval period is selected from these two types of periods. Although the interval period occurs multiple times in the one open / close execution mode, the interval period is not changed in the middle of the one open / close execution mode, and all the interval periods are constant in the one open / close execution mode. It becomes.

After that, the information of the interval period selected in step S1006 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S1007). As a result, the measurement of this interval period is started.

After that, a closing command including the information of the interval period selected this time is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S1008). Upon receiving the closing command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the current interval period and starts measuring the interval period, and also executes the effect corresponding to the current interval period on the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Let me. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform an effect corresponding to the current interval period.

After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S1009). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric open processing to the one corresponding to the special electric closed processing.

When the end condition of the open / close execution mode is satisfied (step S1005: YES), the ending period selection process is executed (step S1010). The ending period is a period secured from the end of the last open state of the special electric winning device 32 to the end of the open / close execution mode in the open / close execution mode. In the ending period, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 In addition, the symbol display device 41 executes an ending effect indicating that the open / close execution mode ends. Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of ending periods, 6 seconds (first ending period) and 12 seconds (second ending period), and the ending period selection process. Then, the side to be the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode of this time is selected from these two types of periods.

After that, the information of the ending period selected in step S1010 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S1011). As a result, the measurement of the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time is started.

After that, an ending command including the information of the ending period selected this time is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S1012). By receiving the ending command, the sound-light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode of this time and starts measuring the ending period, and displays the ending effect corresponding to the ending period of this time. The light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed in the part 54. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period.

After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 2 (step S1013). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric open processing to the one corresponding to the special electric end processing.

<Processing while the special electric train is closed>
Next, the process during closing of the special electric power in step S411 in the special electric power control process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the current interval period has elapsed (step S1101). If a negative determination is made in step S1101, the processing during closing of the special electric train is terminated as it is.

When the current interval period has elapsed (step S1101: YES), the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is provided on the condition that the execution trigger of the current open / close execution mode is one of the jackpot results (step S1102: YES). Is set to "10" (step S1103), and read processing of the open duration corresponding to the jackpot result is executed (step S1104). The content of the read processing of the open duration corresponding to the jackpot result is the same as that of step S907 in the special electric power start processing (FIG. 17). Further, when the execution trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a small hit result (step S1102: NO), the read processing of the opening continuation period corresponding to the small hit result is executed (step S1105). The content of the read processing of the open duration corresponding to the small hit result is the same as that of step S910 in the special electric power start processing (FIG. 17).

When the process of step S1104 or step S1105 is executed, the read open continuation period information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S1106). As a result, the measurement of the opening duration is started. Here, the open continuation period is constant regardless of the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Further, the value of the upper limit number set in the winning counter of the main RAM 64 is also constant regardless of the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c. As a result, it is possible to prevent the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c from affecting the number of game balls paid out when the special electric winning device 32 is won in the opening / closing execution mode.

After that, the opening setting process for opening the special electric winning device 32 is executed (step S1107). Further, a release command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S1108). The release command is a command for causing the sound light side MPU 82 to recognize that the special electric winning device 32 is released. Upon receiving the release command, the sound / light side MPU 82 executes control for switching the effect of the display / light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 in the open / close execution mode accordingly.

After that, the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1109). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric closed processing to the one corresponding to the special electric open processing.

<Special train end processing>
Next, the special electric power termination process in step S412 in the special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time has elapsed (step S1201). If a negative determination is made in step S1201, the special electric train termination process is terminated as it is.

When the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time has elapsed (step S1201: YES), the game state transition process is executed (step S1202). In the game state transition process, if the hit result that triggered the execution of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a 10R low probability jackpot result, the high probability flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" and the high frequency support flag is set to "0". 1 ”is set, and further,“ 80 ”, which is a value corresponding to the end reference number of times, is set in the game number counter. As a result, the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode with the upper limit of 80 game times. In addition, when the hit result that triggered the execution of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a 5R high-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result, "1" is set in the high-probability flag of the main RAM 64 and high-frequency support is provided. Set the flag to "1". As a result, the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. If the hit result that triggered the execution of the open / close execution mode this time is a 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 64 and the high-frequency support flag is executed this time. The state before the mode is started. As a result, if the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode is started is the low frequency support mode, the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery is the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode, and the opening / closing execution mode is changed. If the support mode before the start is the high-frequency support mode, the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. If the hit result that triggered the execution of the open / close execution mode this time is a small hit result, both the high probability flag and the high frequency support flag of the main RAM 64 are before the start of the open / close execution mode. The state of.

After that, on condition that "1" is set in the high frequency support flag of the main RAM 64 (step S1203: YES), the value of the round history counter of the main RAM 64 is read (step S1204), and the read value is read. Is added to the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 (step S1205). As already explained, the round history counter of the main RAM 64 has the number of round game times that occur in the open / close execution mode at the start of the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode triggered by the big hit result. The value is set. Therefore, the total number of rounds counter 64c stores the total number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode.

When a 2R high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained, an open / close execution mode, which is a low-frequency winning mode, is executed, but the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode is not added to the total number of rounds counter 64c. Further, when a small hit result is obtained, the opening / closing execution mode similar to the low frequency winning mode is executed, but the addition of the total number of rounds counter 64c is not executed also in the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, the payout of the game ball is substantially executed, in other words, the number of executions of the round game in which the player is substantially profitable is measured by the total round number counter 64c.

Since the addition process (step S1205) to the total number of rounds counter 64c is executed on the condition that the high frequency support flag is set to "1", an open / close execution mode that becomes a low frequency support mode occurs after the end. However, the addition to the total number of rounds counter 64c is not executed. Further, as described above, when the support mode is changed from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode in step S810 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16), the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is cleared to "0". (Step S811), the transition from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode is executed only in step S810 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16). Therefore, the total number of rounds counter 64c includes the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode, which triggers the transition from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, and the low probability mode thereafter. The total number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode executed before the game times in the low-frequency support mode are started is stored.

When a negative determination is made in step S1203, or when the process of step S1205 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1206). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric end processing to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

<About the processing configuration in the sound light side MPU 82>
Next, each process for controlling the execution of the effect and the notification on the sound / light side MPU 82 will be described.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed in a sound light side MPU 82 with a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

First, the main command storage process is executed (step S1301). The main command storage process is a process for storing the command in the sound / light side RAM 84 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound light side RAM 84 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored and stored in the ring buffer. It is read out sequentially according to the order in which it was created.

After that, the main command correspondence process for performing the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed (step S1302). FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the main command correspondence process.

When the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 62 (step S1401: YES), the game result storage process is executed (step S1402). Specifically, from the information included in the variable command, information on which is the hit / fail judgment result or the distribution judgment result determined by the main MPU 62 at the start of this game round is specified. A process of writing the specified information to the sound / light side RAM 84 is executed. In the storage process, the lottery result data included in the variable command is collated with the lottery result data included in the type command, and the communication of these variable commands and the type command is normally performed. It may be determined whether or not the command is lost, and if the communication is abnormal, the notification process and the data storage process corresponding to the communication may be performed.

After that, the effect pattern determination process is executed (step S1403). The details of the effect pattern determination process will be described later, but the process for determining whether or not to perform the advance notice effect is executed, and the stop display is displayed when the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times on the symbol display device 41 ends. The stop symbol determination process for determining the stop symbol to be touched is executed. Then, the fluctuation duration of the game times set in the change command, the contents of the hit / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result in this game time, and the effect pattern corresponding to the presence / absence of the advance notice effect are selected, and the effect pattern is selected. The data table for the game rotation effect corresponding to is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84. Further, when an extension command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64, the content of the data table for game rotation production is modified according to the content of the extension command. .. In the data table for the game rotation effect finally stored in the sound / light side RAM 84 in step S1403, the execution period of the effect becomes the same as the fluctuation continuation period of the game times determined this time by the main MPU 62. There is. By executing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table, the effect of the current game times corresponding to the above effect pattern is executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Will be done.

After that, the game rounding command is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 (step S1404). The game rotation command includes the pattern command corresponding to the data table for the game rotation effect read into the sound / light side RAM 84 in the effect pattern determination process (step S1403) and the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process. The stop result command corresponding to the information of is transmitted to the display side MPU 92. By receiving these commands, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to these commands from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94. Then, by executing the display control according to the display data table, the symbol display device 41 executes the moving image display of the current game times corresponding to the stop symbol determined by the above-mentioned effect pattern and the stop symbol determination process. To.

When the final stop command is received from the main MPU 62 (step S1405: YES), the final stop process is executed (step S1406). In the final stop processing, the final stop period of this game is grasped from the content of the final stop command, the measurement of the final stop period is started, and the data table corresponding to the final stop period is sounded from the sound / light side ROM 83. Read to the optical side RAM 84. Since the final stop period is set to 0.5 seconds and 3 seconds as already explained, the data table corresponding to the final stop period is the data table corresponding to 0.5 seconds and the data corresponding to 3 seconds. There is a table. By executing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table, the effect corresponding to the final stop period of this time is executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Further, the sound / light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to this final stop period to the display side MPU 92. Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 causes the symbol display device 41 to start the static display of each symbol that is the result of stopping the game round this time. The static display will continue for the final stop period of this game.

When the opening command is received from the main MPU 62 (step S1407: YES), the opening process is executed (step S1408). In the opening process, the current opening period is grasped from the content of the opening command, the measurement of the opening period is started, and the data table corresponding to the opening period is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84. Since the opening period is set to 4 seconds and 10 seconds as already explained, a data table corresponding to 4 seconds and a data table corresponding to 10 seconds are provided as the data table corresponding to the opening period. There is. By executing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table, the opening effect corresponding to the current opening period is executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Further, the sound / light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the current opening period to the display side MPU 92. Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to the command from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94. Then, by executing the display control according to the display data table, the moving image display corresponding to the current opening period is executed on the symbol display device 41. The opening effect is not only set according to the type of opening period, but may also be set according to the type of hit result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the opening effects of the 2R high accuracy big hit result and the small hit result are common.

When the release command is received from the main MPU 62 (step S1409: YES), the release process is executed (step S1410). In the release process, the current release duration is grasped from the content of the release command, and the data table corresponding to the release continuation period is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84. As already explained, two types of open duration are set, 0.5 seconds and 29 seconds, so the data table corresponding to the open duration is the data table corresponding to 0.5 seconds and the data corresponding to 29 seconds. There is a table. By executing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table, the opening effect corresponding to the current opening continuation period is executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. The speaker. Further, the sound / light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the current opening duration to the display side MPU 92. Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to the command from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94. Then, by executing the display control according to the display data table, the moving image display corresponding to the current open continuation period is executed by the symbol display device 41. In addition, the opening effect is not only set according to the type of opening duration, but also corresponds to the type of hit result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode and the number of round games executed in one opening / closing execution mode. The configuration may be set so as to be set. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the 2R high accuracy big hit result and the small hit result are common during the opening effect.

When the closing command is received from the main MPU 62 (step S1411: YES), the closing process is executed (step S1412). In the closing process, the current interval period is grasped from the content of the closing command, and the data table corresponding to the interval period is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84. Since two types of interval periods, 2 seconds and 6 seconds, are set as described above, a data table corresponding to 2 seconds and a data table corresponding to 6 seconds are provided as data tables corresponding to the interval period. There is. By executing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table, the closing effect corresponding to the current interval period is executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. .. Further, the sound / light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to this interval period to the display side MPU 92. Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to the command from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94. Then, by executing the display control according to the display data table, the moving image display corresponding to the current interval period is executed by the symbol display device 41. It should be noted that the closing effect is not only set according to the type of the interval period, but may also be set according to the type of the hit result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the 2R high-accuracy big hit result and the small hit result are common during closing.

When the ending command is received from the main MPU 62 (step S1413: YES), the ending process is executed (step S1414). In the ending process, the current ending period is grasped from the content of the ending command, the measurement of the ending period is started, and the data table corresponding to the ending period is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84. As already explained, two types of ending periods, 6 seconds and 12 seconds, are set, so a data table corresponding to 6 seconds and a data table corresponding to 12 seconds are provided as data tables corresponding to the ending period. There is. By executing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table, the ending effect corresponding to the current ending period is executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Further, the sound / light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the current ending period to the display side MPU 92. Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to the command from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94. Then, by executing the display control according to the display data table, the moving image display corresponding to the current ending period is executed on the symbol display device 41. The ending effect is not only set according to the type of ending period, but may also be set according to the type of hit result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the ending effects of the 2R high accuracy big hit result and the small hit result are common.

In the main command corresponding process, other processes are executed in addition to the above-mentioned various processes (step S1415). In other processes, a process for notifying and a process for performing a demo effect are executed.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 21), after executing the main command corresponding process in step S1302, the light emission control process is executed (step S1303) and the sound output control process is executed (step S1304). In the light emission control process, a process for controlling the light emission of the display light emitting unit 53 is executed according to the data table stored in the sound light side RAM 84. In the sound output control process, a process for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 54 is executed according to the data table stored in the sound / light side RAM 84.

<Processing configuration for giving a moderate profit to the player>
Next, a processing configuration for ensuring that an appropriate profit is given to the player will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a cycle setting process executed in step S306 of the launch control process (FIG. 11) on the main MPU 62.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the first reference value (step S1501). As already explained in the total number of rounds counter 64c, the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode, which triggers the transition from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, and the low probability mode thereafter. The total number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode executed before the game times in the low-frequency support mode are started is stored. The first reference value is a value larger than the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, and is triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result (or the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result). It is the value of the number of round games executed in the opened / closed execution mode. Specifically, it is set to "10". As a result, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c does not reach the first reference value even if the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high accuracy jackpot result occurs only once in the low frequency support mode. Further, in the low frequency support mode, when the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R high accuracy jackpot result (or the 10R low accuracy jackpot result) occurs once, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c reaches the first reference value.

The first reference value is not limited to "10", and is a value larger than the value of the number of times the round game is executed in the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode in which the number of times the round game is executed is relatively small. The value may be less than or equal to the number of times the round game is executed in the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of times the round game is executed is relatively large. Further, the first reference value may be a value larger than the value of the number of times the round game is executed in the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of times the round game is executed is relatively large, and the number of times the round game is executed is relatively large. The value may be less than or equal to the number of times the round game is executed in the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode.

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is less than the first reference value (step S1501: YES), in the first cycle that enables 100 game balls to be fired in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 per minute. The corresponding information is set (step S1502). The first cycle is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfaction signal from the firing control unit 78c, the first cycle A launch instruction signal is transmitted to the launch control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation is such that the number of rotations is increased, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the first cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S1503). The second reference value is the total number of round games executed when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result (or the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result) occurs twice, which is the first multiple times. The total number of round games executed when the open / close execution mode is the second multiple times, which is a value larger than the value and is triggered by the 10R high probability jackpot result (or 10R low probability jackpot result). It is the value of. Specifically, it is set to "30". As a result, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is generated in the low frequency support mode, and the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is further generated in the subsequent high frequency support mode. Even if the open / close execution mode is triggered, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c does not reach the second reference value. Further, when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result further occurs in the subsequent high-frequency support mode, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c reaches the second reference value. The second reference value is not limited to "30", and may be less than 30 as long as it is a value larger than the first reference value and smaller than the third reference value. It may be a value larger than "30".

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S1503: YES). Information corresponding to the second cycle that enables firing of 90 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S1504). The second cycle is about 0.67 seconds, which is the second shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfaction signal from the firing control unit 78c, the second cycle A launch instruction signal is transmitted to the launch control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation is such that the number of rotations is increased, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S1505). The third reference value is the value of the total number of round games executed when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result (or the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result) occurs five times, which is the third plurality of times. The total number of round games executed when the opening / closing execution mode is the fourth multiple times, which is a value larger than the value and is triggered by the 10R high probability jackpot result (or the 10R low probability jackpot result), occurs 6 times. It is the value of. Specifically, it is set to "60". As a result, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is generated in the low frequency support mode, and the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is further generated in the subsequent high frequency support mode. Even if the opening / closing execution mode triggered four times occurs, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c does not reach the third reference value. Further, when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result further occurs in the subsequent high-frequency support mode, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c reaches the third reference value. The third reference value is not limited to "60", and may be less than 60 or larger than "60" as long as it is larger than the second reference value. ..

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S1505: YES). Information corresponding to the third cycle that enables the firing of 80 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S1506). The third cycle is 0.75 seconds, which is the second longest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the third cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfaction signal from the firing control unit 78c, the third cycle A launch instruction signal is transmitted to the launch control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the third cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation is such that the number of rotations is increased, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the third cycle elapses.

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S1505: NO), in the fourth cycle which enables the firing of 70 game balls per minute in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64. The corresponding information is set (step S1507). The fourth cycle is about 0.86 seconds, which is the longest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the 4th cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfaction signal from the firing control unit 78c, the 4th cycle A launch instruction signal is transmitted to the launch control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the fourth cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation is such that the amount of rotation is such that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the fourth cycle elapses.

As described above, the larger the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64, the longer the firing cycle of the game ball. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes long. Will be. As the firing cycle of the game balls becomes longer, the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

The firing cycle of the game ball gradually increases as the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c increases. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the more times it occurs, the more times it occurs. The firing cycle of the game ball becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

The firing cycle of the game ball is maintained at 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle, if the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is played five times occurs only once. As a result, it is possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from becoming excessive.

Even if the open / close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode or the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed, the total number of rounds counter 64c is not added. As a result, it is possible to prevent the regulation on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from occurring even when there is substantially no profit in granting the game balls. ..

Addition to the total number of rounds counter 64c is performed when the open / close execution mode ends, and does not occur in the middle of the open / close execution mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the firing cycle of the game ball from being suddenly delayed in the middle of the opening / closing execution mode.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a period adjustment process executed in step S616 of the change continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the main MPU 62.

In the period adjustment process, when the longest period has already been selected as the variable duration of the game times this time (step S1601: YES), the process for extending the variable duration of the game times shown in steps S1602 and thereafter is not executed. As described above, when a game number that results in a jackpot occurs in a situation where the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or higher than the third reference value, step S604 in the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration (FIG. 14) occurs. The longest period is selected as the fluctuation duration of this game. In this case, if the longest period has already been selected, the process for extending the variation duration of the game times shown in step S1602 and subsequent steps is not executed, so that the long period of the variation duration of the game times is long. It is possible to prevent the conversion from being cumulatively executed for the fluctuation duration of one game.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is not the longest period (step S1601: NO), and the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value. (Step S1602: YES), the first extension process of the fluctuation duration period is executed (step S1603). Specifically, 1 second is added as the first extension period to the fluctuation continuation period acquired in step S614 in the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14). In addition, a first extension command indicating that the fluctuation duration of the game times this time has been extended by the first extension period is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S1604). When the sound light side MPU 82 receives the first extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the first extension period, and the data table for the game times production corresponding to the extension. Correct the contents of. This will be described in detail later. The first reference value is "10" as described above, and the second reference value is "30" as described above.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is not the longest period (step S1601: NO), and the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the second reference value and less than the third reference value. (Step S1605: YES), the second extension process of the fluctuation duration period is executed (step S1606). Specifically, 2 seconds is added as the second extension period to the fluctuation continuation period acquired in step S614 in the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14). In addition, a second extension command indicating that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the second extension period is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S1607). When the sound light side MPU 82 receives the second extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the second extension period, and the data table for the game times production corresponding to the extension. Correct the contents of. This will be described in detail later. The third reference value is "60" as already explained.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is not the longest period (step S1601: NO) and the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S1608: YES), the fluctuation The third extension process of the duration period is executed (step S1609). Specifically, 3 seconds is added as the third extension period to the fluctuation continuation period acquired in step S614 in the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14). Further, a third extension command indicating that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the third extension period is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S1610). When the sound light side MPU 82 receives the third extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the third extension period, and also has a data table for the game times production corresponding to the extension. Correct the contents of. This will be described in detail later.

As described above, the larger the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game times executed in the high frequency support mode. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is set. However, the fluctuation duration of the game times will be long. Then, as the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer, the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

The extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes gradually longer as the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c increases. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the more times it occurs, the more times it occurs. The fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of times the game is generated per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

The fluctuation duration of the game times is not extended only by the opening / closing execution mode of the high frequency winning mode in which the round games are played 5 times. This makes it possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of times of game occurrence per unit time from becoming excessive.

Even if the open / close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode or the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed, the total number of rounds counter 64c is not added. As a result, it is possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of times of game occurrence per unit time from being generated even when there is substantially no profit in granting the game ball.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern determination process executed in step S1403 of the main command correspondence process (FIG. 22) in the sound / light side MPU 82.

First, the information on the fluctuation duration of the game times is grasped from the fluctuation command received this time (step S1701). After that, the lottery process for the advance notice effect is executed (step S1702). In the lottery process of the advance notice effect, it is decided by lottery whether or not to generate the advance notice effect in this game round. In the notice effect, the symbol display device 41 stops the variable display of the symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 and the variable display of the symbol in the lower symbol row Z3 to form a combination of reach symbols with the same symbol, and the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is formed. It is performed in the situation where the variable display of is continued. In the advance notice effect, a character image different from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed for a predetermined period. In the lottery process of the advance notice effect, the lottery is executed so that the game times corresponding to the jackpot result are more likely to generate the advance notice effect than the game times corresponding to the off result.

After that, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S1703). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game round is either a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, a 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, the same symbol is on one effective line L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of is established is determined as the information of the stop result of this time. The effective lines L1 to L5 in which the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

The 5R high-accuracy jackpot result and the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result have a higher probability that the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed than the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result. In addition, the probability that the combination of "7" symbols is stopped and displayed in the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result is higher than that in the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result and the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result. Further, if the game result of this game round is a 2R high-accuracy big hit result or a small hit result, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and one effective line L1. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of specific symbols (“3.4.1”) is established on ~ L5 is determined as the information of the stop result this time. In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game time is out of order, the presence / absence of reach display is specified from the content of the change command. Then, when the reach display occurs, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the specific symbols are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and it is on the one or two effective lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the reach symbols is established is determined as the information of the stop result this time. On the other hand, when the reach display does not occur, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the specific symbols are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the reach is reached on all the effective lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of symbols is not established is determined as the information of the stop result this time.

After that, the information on the fluctuation duration of the game times set in the change command received this time, the contents of the hit / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result in this game time, and the effect pattern corresponding to the presence / absence of the advance notice effect. Is selected, and the data table for the game rotation effect corresponding to the effect pattern is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84 (step S1704). The effect pattern does not reflect the information of the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S1703), but the information of the stop symbol is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 as described above. Therefore, the moving image display of the game times in the symbol display device 41 corresponds to the above-mentioned effect pattern and corresponds to the information of the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S1703).

FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the data table for the game rotation effect to be selected when the small hit result is not obtained.

As shown in FIG. 26, when the fluctuation duration of the game times is 2 seconds or 3 seconds, it is not a big hit result, and further, the advance notice effect is not won in the lottery process of the advance notice effect. Therefore, when the fluctuation duration of the game times specified in the fluctuation command is 2 seconds, the first data table is selected as the data table for the game times production, and the fluctuation duration of the game times is 3 seconds. In some cases, the second data table is selected as the data table for the game rotation effect.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is 5 seconds or more, there are a plurality of data tables corresponding to the presence / absence of the jackpot result and the presence / absence of the advance notice effect. Therefore, when the fluctuation duration of the game times specified in the fluctuation command is 5 or more, the data table corresponding to the presence / absence of the jackpot result and the presence / absence of the advance notice effect is selected from the corresponding plurality of data tables. To.

The 10-minute fluctuation duration is the longest fluctuation duration of the game times in the pachinko machine 10. As already explained, when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or higher than the third reference value and a game number that is either a 10R low accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high accuracy jackpot result occurs, the fluctuation continues. In step S604 in the period acquisition process (FIG. 14), the longest period is selected as the variable continuation period of the current game times. And the longest period is not selected except in the situation. Therefore, the longest duration of fluctuation of 10 minutes is selected only in the case of jackpot results. On the other hand, even if it is the longest period, the advance notice effect may or may not be executed. Therefore, the n + 4 data table is selected when the fluctuation duration is 10 minutes and the notice effect does not occur, and the n + 5 data table is selected when the notice effect occurs during the fluctuation duration of 10 minutes. Will be done.

As described above, the longest period is selected when a game number that is either a 10R low accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high accuracy jackpot result occurs in a situation where the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result and the 10R The fluctuation duration of the game times, which is one of the high-accuracy jackpot results, becomes extremely long. Then, as the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer, it takes a long time until the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds, which is the high frequency winning mode, occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

When the maximum fluctuation duration of 10 minutes is selected, in the moving image display of the game times on the symbol display device 41, the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started, and then the upper symbol row Z1 The variation display of the symbol in is stopped, and further, the variation display of the symbol in the lower symbol sequence Z3 is stopped. In this case, the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed by stopping and displaying the same symbol on one or two effective lines L1 to L5 in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. Then, in this situation, the reach display is performed by continuing the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol string Z2. When the notice effect occurs, the character corresponding to the notice effect is displayed when the reach display is started. After that, an image showing that the combination of reach symbols and the variable display of the symbols are performed in the middle symbol row Z2 is reduced and displayed in the corner portion of the symbol display device 41, and instead, the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is displayed. A movie image dedicated to a long period of time, which is a live-action image along a series of stories, is displayed in substantially the entire area of 41a.

FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the movie image dedicated to the longest period displayed on the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 shows that a combination of reach symbols and a variable display of symbols are performed in the middle symbol row Z2 at the upper right corner portion thereof. Image G1 is displayed. Then, the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed in a large display range including the center of the display surface 41a. The movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is not displayed when the reach display occurs or the reach display does not occur. In addition, it is not displayed in the game times that result in a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, a 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, or a small hit result. Therefore, when the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed, the occurrence of the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is confirmed. That is, when the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed, it is confirmed that the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds, which is the high frequency winning mode, is generated. As a result, it is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player with the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period.

When the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed, the remaining time image G3 for notifying the remaining time of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed in the upper left corner portion of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Is displayed. In this case, since the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period ends when the fluctuation continuation period of the game times elapses, it can be said that the remaining time image G3 notifies the remaining time of the fluctuation duration of the game times. By displaying the remaining time image G3 in this way, when the fluctuation duration of the game times is the longest period, the player can grasp the remaining time of the fluctuation duration of the game times. , It is possible to alleviate the player's anxiety about the fact that the game round does not end easily.

The timing at which the display of the remaining time image G3 is started will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 27 (b). FIG. 27 (b1) shows the execution period of the game round, and FIG. 27 (b2) shows the period during which the pre-reach display in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is performed without stopping the fluctuation display of the symbols. 27 (b3) shows the period during which the reach display is executed, FIG. 27 (b4) shows the period during which the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed, and FIG. 27 (b5) shows the remaining time image G3. Indicates the period during which is displayed.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 27 (b1), the longest game round is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 27 (b2), the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. After that, the fluctuation display of the symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped, and the fluctuation display of the symbol in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped at the timing of t2, so that as shown in FIG. 27 (b2) at the timing of the t2. The pre-reach display is terminated and the reach display is started as shown in FIG. 27 (b3).

After that, at the timing of t3, the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is started as shown in FIG. 27 (b4), and further, at the timing of t3, the display of the remaining time image G3 is started as shown in FIG. 27 (b5). It will be started. Then, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIGS. 27 (b3) and 27 (b4), the reach display is terminated when the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is terminated. Further, at the timing of t4, the time displayed in the remaining time image G3 becomes 0 seconds, and further, as shown in FIG. 27 (b5), the remaining time image G3 is not displayed. After that, when the final stop period elapses at the timing of t5, the current game round ends as shown in FIG. 27 (b1).

As described above, when the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is started, the display of the remaining time image G3 is started. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds, which is the high frequency winning mode, is generated by starting the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period, and the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period can be recognized. It is possible to prevent the player's attention to the display of the remaining time from being lowered by the display of the remaining time image G3.

Returning to the explanation of the effect pattern determination process (FIG. 25), after reading the data table for the game rotation effect into the sound light side RAM 84 in step S1704, the first extension command, the second extension command, and the second extension command from the main MPU 62 It is determined whether or not any of the third extension commands has been received (step S1705). When any of the first extension command, the second extension command, and the third extension command is received (step S1705: YES), the variation duration extension process is executed (step S1706). In the variation continuation period extension processing, if the first extension command is received, the variation duration of the game times grasped in step S1701 is extended by 1 second, and the second extension command is received. For example, the fluctuation duration of the game times grasped in step S1701 is extended by 2 seconds, and if the third extension command is received, the fluctuation duration of the game times grasped in step S1701 is extended by 3 seconds. As a result, the fluctuation duration of the game times grasped by the sound light side MPU 82 can be made the same as the fluctuation duration of the game times grasped by the main MPU 62.

After that, the correction process of the data table is executed (step S1707). In the data table correction process, a process for correcting the contents of the game time effect data table read into the sound / light side RAM 84 in step S1704 is executed according to the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game time. The modification of the data table for the game performance will be described below.

28 (a) to 28 (c) are time charts for explaining how the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. FIG. 28A shows a case where the variation duration of the game times is 5 seconds, the variation display of the symbols in each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is sequentially stopped, and the reach display does not occur, and FIG. 28B shows the game. FIG. 28 (c) shows a case where the fluctuation duration of the times is 2 seconds and the fluctuation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped at the same time and the reach display does not occur. FIG. 28 (c) shows the fluctuation duration of the game times is 20. It is a second, and indicates a case where the variation display of the symbols in each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is sequentially stopped and the reach display occurs. In addition, FIGS. 28 (a1), 28 (b1), and 28 (c1) show the period during which the symbol variation is displayed in the upper symbol row Z1, and FIGS. 28 (a2) and 28 (b2). And FIG. 28 (c2) show the period during which the symbol variation is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, and FIGS. 28 (a3), 28 (b3) and 28 (c3) are shown in the lower symbol row Z3. Indicates the period during which the symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

When the variation duration of the game times is 5 seconds, the variation display of the symbols in each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is stopped in sequence and the reach display does not occur, as shown in FIGS. 28 (a1) to 28 (a3). At the timing of t1, the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. In this case, high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol displayed on the display surface 41a in all the symbol rows of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 is impossible or difficult in appearance. Will be done. After that, first, at the timing of t2 for the upper symbol row Z1, the high-speed fluctuation display is changed to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a in the upper symbol row Z1 can be easily identified in appearance. It is switched, and at the timing of t3 thereafter, the variation display of the symbols in the upper symbol sequence Z1 is stopped as shown in FIG. 28 (a1). After that, the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a in the lower symbol row Z3 can be easily identified in appearance, and the timing of t4. As shown in FIG. 28 (a3), the variation display of the symbols in the lower symbol sequence Z3 is stopped. After that, with respect to the middle symbol row Z2, the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a in the middle symbol row Z2 can be easily identified in appearance, and the timing of t5. As shown in FIG. 28 (a2), the variation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped. In the above case, from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2, high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol is impossible or difficult in appearance in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is 2 seconds and the fluctuation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped at the same time and the reach display does not occur, as shown in FIGS. 28 (b1) to 28 (b3). At the timing of t11, the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. In this case, high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol displayed on the display surface 41a in all the symbol rows of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 is impossible or difficult in appearance. Will be done. After that, at the timing of t12, the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 can be easily identified in appearance. After that, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIGS. 28 (b1) to 28 (b3), the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped. In the above case, from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12, high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol is impossible or difficult in appearance in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

When the variation duration of the game times is 20 seconds, the variation display of the symbols in each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is sequentially stopped and the reach display occurs, as shown in FIGS. At the timing of t21, the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. In this case, high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol displayed on the display surface 41a in all the symbol rows of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 is impossible or difficult in appearance. Will be done. After that, first, at the timing of t22 for the upper symbol row Z1, the high-speed fluctuation display is changed to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a in the upper symbol row Z1 can be easily identified in appearance. It is switched, and at the timing of t23 thereafter, the variation display of the symbols in the upper symbol sequence Z1 is stopped as shown in FIG. 28 (c1). After that, the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a in the lower symbol row Z3 can be easily identified in appearance, and the timing of t24. As shown in FIG. 28 (c3), the variation display of the symbols in the lower symbol sequence Z3 is stopped. At the timing of t24, the reach display is started by forming a combination of reach symbols by the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. After that, in the situation where the reach display is being executed, the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the symbols displayed on the display surface 41a in the middle symbol row Z2 can be easily identified in appearance. At the timing of t25, as shown in FIG. 28 (c2), the variation display of the symbols in the middle symbol sequence Z2 is stopped. In the above case, from the timing of t21 to the timing of t22, high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol is impossible or difficult in appearance in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

As described above, regardless of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z1 over a predetermined high-speed fluctuation display period after the fluctuation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. In Z3, high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol becomes impossible or difficult in appearance. In this case, if the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended, this high-speed fluctuation display period is extended.

FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a data table for playing a game.

In the data table for the game time production, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the target game time is set, and information on the content of the task is set corresponding to each pointer information. ing. The task content information is information set to perform an effect corresponding to the current game times, and the display light emitting unit 53 so as to execute the effect according to the task content information in each frame. Light emission control and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed.

In the data table for the game rotation effect shown in FIG. 29, the data at the start of fluctuation is set in the pointer information of "0", and the pointer information of "160" is the low speed in the fluctuation display of the symbol in the upper symbol sequence Z1. The data at the start of the variable display is set, the data at the stop of the variable display of the symbol in the upper symbol column Z1 is set in the pointer information of "200", and the lower is set in the pointer information of "300". The data at the time of stopping the variation display of the symbol in the symbol string Z3 is set, the data at the start of the advance notice effect is set in the pointer information of "400", and the super reach starts in the pointer information of "700". The time data is set, and the pointer information of "1400" is set to the data at the time when the variation display of the symbol in the middle symbol string Z2 is stopped. In the pointer information other than these, data for updating the content of the effect between each timing is set.

In such a data table for game rotation effect, the pointer information of "0" to the pointer information of "160" is displayed in high-speed fluctuation so that the identification of each symbol is impossible or difficult in appearance in all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3. Is the high-speed fluctuation display period in which is performed. Therefore, when the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended, the pointer information for the period corresponding to this extension is added to the range of the pointer information of "0" to the pointer information of "160". The range of pointer information corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display is increased by the period corresponding to this extension. Then, the combination of the pointer information after "161" and the information of the content of the corresponding task is shifted to the rear side by the amount of the added pointer information. Further, data for continuing the effect corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display is written in the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information added in the range of the pointer information corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display. When adding the pointer information, when the first extension command is received from the main MPU 62, the pointer information corresponding to 1 second is added to the pointer information range corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display, and the main side is added. When the second extension command is received from the MPU 62, the pointer information corresponding to 2 seconds is added to the pointer information range corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display, and the third extension command is received from the main MPU 62. If so, the pointer information corresponding to 3 seconds is added to the pointer information range corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display. As a result, the data table for the game rotation effect stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 83 is modified in accordance with the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times this time.

Here, as described above, after the effect pattern determination process (step S1403) is executed in the main command correspondence process (FIG. 22) of the sound light side MPU 82, the effect pattern determination process (step S1403) is performed. The pattern command corresponding to the read data table for the game rotation effect and the stop result command corresponding to the information of the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S1703) are transmitted to the display side MPU 92. In this case, if the data table modification process (step S1707) is not executed in the sound / light side MPU 82, the data table for the game rotation effect read into the sound / light side RAM 84 in the data table read process (step S1704). A pattern command in which the information corresponding to is set is transmitted to the display side MPU 92. Further, when the data table modification process (step S1707) is executed in the sound light side MPU 82, it corresponds to the data table for game rotation effect read into the sound light side RAM 84 in the data table read process (step S1704). A pattern command in which not only the information to be played but also the information corresponding to the extended duration of the fluctuation of the game times is set is transmitted to the display side MPU 92.

When the display side MPU 92 receives the pattern command and the stop result command, the information corresponding to the data table for the game rotation effect read into the sound light side RAM 84 in the data table read processing (step S1704) in the pattern command first. Then, the display data table corresponding to the combination of information corresponding to the stop result command is read from the display side ROM 93 to the display side RAM 94. The data structure of the display data table is basically the same as that of the game time production data table. Specifically, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the target game time is set. Therefore, the task content information is set corresponding to each pointer information. The task content information in the display data table is information set for displaying a moving image corresponding to the current game times, and an image is displayed in each frame according to the task content information. This is information for controlling the display of the symbol display device 41.

In this case, if the received pattern command is set with information corresponding to the period in which the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended, the same as in the data table correction process (step S1707) in the sound light side MPU 82. , Increase the range of pointer information corresponding to high-speed fluctuation display in the display data table by the period corresponding to this extension. Then, the pointer information following the range of the pointer information corresponding to the high-speed variable display and the information of the content of the corresponding task are shifted to the rear side by the amount of the added pointer information. Further, data for continuing the high-speed fluctuation display is written in the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information added in the range of the pointer information corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display. When adding the pointer information, when the first extension command is received from the main MPU 62, the pointer information corresponding to 1 second is added to the pointer information range corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display, and the main side is added. When the second extension command is received from the MPU 62, the pointer information corresponding to 2 seconds is added to the pointer information range corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display, and the third extension command is received from the main MPU 62. If so, the pointer information corresponding to 3 seconds is added to the pointer information range corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display. As a result, the display data table stored in advance in the display side ROM 93 is modified in accordance with the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times this time.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended as described above, the high-speed fluctuation display period in which the high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol is impossible or difficult in appearance in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is set. It will be extended. As a result, it is possible to extend the fluctuation duration of the game times while not giving the player a sense of discomfort.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended, the data table for the game times production stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 83 is modified and displayed in accordance with the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times this time. The display data table stored in advance in the side ROM 93 is modified in accordance with the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times this time. As a result, it is not necessary to store the data table for the game rotation effect and the display data table corresponding to the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times in the ROMs 83 and 93 in advance. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times while suppressing the increase in the storage capacity required for the ROMs 83 and 93.

Next, the final stop period selection process executed in step S704 of the special figure changing process (FIG. 15) on the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30 (a).

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the second reference value (step S1801: NO), the first final stop period is selected as the final stop period of the current game round (step S1802). The first final suspension period is 0.5 seconds. When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S1801: YES), the second final stop period is selected as the final stop period of the current game round (step S1803). The second final suspension period is 3 seconds. The second reference value is "30" as described above.

As described above, when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the final stop period of the game times executed in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is set. However, the final suspension period of the game times will be longer. Then, as the final stop period of the game times becomes longer, the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

Opening / closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games Opening / closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games does not extend the final stop period of the game even if the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode occurs twice. When the mode occurs three times, the final stop period of the game times is extended. This makes it possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of times of game occurrence per unit time from becoming excessive.

Next, the opening period selection process executed in step S803 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 16) on the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30 (b).

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the second reference value (step S1811: NO), the first opening period is selected as the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode this time (step S1812). The first opening period is 4 seconds. When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S1811: YES), the second opening period is selected as the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode this time (step S1813). The second opening period is 10 seconds. The second reference value is "30" as described above.

As described above, when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the opening period of the open / close execution mode generated in the high frequency support mode becomes long. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low frequency support mode, the opening period of the open / close execution mode Will be longer. Then, as the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode becomes longer, the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

The opening period of the open / close execution mode is not extended even if the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is played 10 times occurs twice, and the opening / closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is played 10 times. When the mode occurs three times, the opening period of the open / close execution mode is extended. As a result, it is possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

Next, the interval period selection process executed in step S1006 of the special electric opening processing (FIG. 18) on the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30 (c).

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the second reference value (step S1821: NO), the first interval period is selected as the current interval period (step S1822). The first interval period is 2 seconds. When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S1821: YES), the second interval period is selected as the current interval period (step S1823). The second interval period is 6 seconds. The second reference value is "30" as described above.

As described above, when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the interval period of the open / close execution mode generated in the high frequency support mode becomes long. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low frequency support mode, the interval period of the open / close execution mode Will be longer. Then, as the interval period of the open / close execution mode becomes long, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

The interval period of the open / close execution mode is not extended even if the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is played 10 times occurs twice, and the open / close execution of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is played 10 times. When the mode occurs three times, the interval period of the open / close execution mode is extended. As a result, it is possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

Addition to the total number of rounds counter 64c is performed when the open / close execution mode ends, and does not occur in the middle of the open / close execution mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interval period from suddenly becoming long in the middle of the open / close execution mode.

Next, the ending period selection process executed in step S1010 of the special electric opening processing (FIG. 18) in the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30 (d).

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the second reference value (step S1831: NO), the first ending period is selected as the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode this time (step S1832). The first ending period is 6 seconds. When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S1831: YES), the second ending period is selected as the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode this time (step S1833). The second ending period is 12 seconds. The second reference value is "30" as described above.

As described above, when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the ending period of the open / close execution mode generated in the high frequency support mode becomes long. As a result, if the open / close execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low frequency support mode, the ending period of the open / close execution mode Will be longer. Then, as the ending period of the open / close execution mode becomes long, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

The ending period of the open / close execution mode is not extended if the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is played 10 times occurs twice, and the opening / closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is played 10 times When the mode occurs three times, the ending period of the open / close execution mode is extended. As a result, it is possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

Next, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low frequency support mode, the open / close execution mode per unit time. The state in which the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the above occurs step by step will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 31 (a) shows the progress of the game state, FIG. 31 (b) shows how the firing cycle of the game ball changes, and FIG. 31 (c) shows how the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended. 31 (d) shows how the final stop period of the game round changes, and FIG. 31 (e) shows how the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening / closing execution mode change.

As shown in FIG. 31 (a), in a normal game state in which the low probability mode is the low frequency support mode and the open / close execution mode is not, a game round that results in a 2R high accuracy jackpot occurs at the timing of t1, and the game times of t2 At the timing, the round game in the low-frequency winning mode triggered by the 2R high-probability jackpot result ends the opening / closing execution mode twice. In this case, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is maintained at "0". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), in the gaming state in which the high probability mode is the low frequency support mode from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3, the game ball is as shown in FIG. 31 (b). As for the firing cycle, the first cycle, which is the shortest firing cycle, is maintained, and as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the situation in which the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times does not occur is maintained, and as shown in FIG. 31 (d). The final stop period of the game round is the relatively short first final stop period, and as shown in FIG. 31 (e), the opening period of the open / close execution mode is the relatively short first opening period of the open / close execution mode. The interval period is a relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the open / close execution mode is a relatively short first ending period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31A, a game round that results in a 5R high-probability jackpot occurs at the timing of t3, which is a high-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode, and the 5R high-probability jackpot result occurs at the timing of t4. The open / close execution mode of 5 round games in the high-frequency winning mode triggered by the above is completed. In this case, since the high-frequency support mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode ends, "5" corresponding to the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode ended this time is added to the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64. To. Therefore, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes "5" at the timing of t4. This value is less than the first reference value of "10". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), in the gaming state which is the high probability mode from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5 and is the high frequency support mode, the game ball is launched as shown in FIG. 31 (b). As for the cycle, the first cycle, which is the shortest firing cycle, is maintained, and as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the situation in which the fluctuation duration of the game times is not extended is maintained, and as shown in FIG. 31 (d), the game is played. The final stop period of the times is a relatively short first final stop period, and as shown in FIG. 31 (e), the opening period of the open / close execution mode is a relatively short first opening period, and the interval of the open / close execution mode. The period is a relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the open / close execution mode is a relatively short first ending period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31A, a game round that results in a 10R high-probability jackpot occurs at the timing of t5, which is a high-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, and the 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs at the timing of t6. The opening / closing execution mode of 10 round games in the high-frequency winning mode triggered by the above is completed. In this case, since the high-frequency support mode is maintained after the opening / closing execution mode ends, "10" corresponding to the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode ended this time is set for the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Will be added. Therefore, at the timing of t6, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes “15”. This value is equal to or greater than the first reference value of "10" and less than the second reference value of "30". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), in the gaming state which is the high probability mode from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7 and is the high frequency support mode, the game ball is launched as shown in FIG. 31 (b). The cycle is the second cycle, which is the second shortest firing cycle, and as shown in FIG. 31 (c), a one-step extension (that is, one second) occurs for the fluctuation duration of the game times. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31 (d), the final stop period of the game round is a relatively short first final stop period, and as shown in FIG. 31 (e), the opening period of the open / close execution mode is relatively short. It is the first opening period, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode is the relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode is the relatively short first ending period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31A, a game round that results in a 10R low probability jackpot occurs at the timing of t7, which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, and the 10R low probability jackpot result occurs at the timing of t8. The opening / closing execution mode of 10 round games in the high-frequency winning mode triggered by the above is completed. In this case, since the high-frequency support mode is maintained after the opening / closing execution mode ends, "10" corresponding to the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode ended this time is set for the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Will be added. Therefore, at the timing of t8, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes “25”. This value is equal to or greater than the first reference value of "10" and less than the second reference value of "30". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), in the gaming state which is the low probability mode from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9 and is the high frequency support mode, the game ball is launched as shown in FIG. 31 (b). The cycle is maintained in the second cycle, which is the second shortest firing cycle, and as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the situation in which one step extension (that is, 1 second) occurs with respect to the fluctuation duration of the game times is maintained. The final stop period of the game round is a relatively short first final stop period as shown in FIG. 31 (d), and the opening period of the open / close execution mode is relatively short as shown in FIG. 31 (e). It is the first opening period, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode is the relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode is the relatively short first ending period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31A, a game round that results in a 10R high-probability jackpot occurs at the timing of t9, which is a low-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, and the 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs at the timing of t10. The opening / closing execution mode of 10 round games in the high-frequency winning mode triggered by the above is completed. In this case, since the high-frequency support mode is maintained after the opening / closing execution mode ends, "10" corresponding to the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode ended this time is set for the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Will be added. Therefore, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes "35" at the timing of t10. This value is equal to or greater than the second reference value of "30" and less than or equal to the third reference value of "60". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), in the gaming state which is the high probability mode from the timing of t10 to the timing of t11 and is the high frequency support mode, the game ball is launched as shown in FIG. 31 (b). The cycle is the third cycle, which is the second longest firing cycle, and as shown in FIG. 31 (c), there is a situation in which a two-step extension (that is, 2 seconds) occurs with respect to the fluctuation duration of the game times. As shown in 31 (d), the final stop period of the game round is a relatively long second final stop period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), a game round that results in a 10R high-accuracy jackpot occurs at the timing of t11, and a round game in the high-frequency winning mode triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs at the timing of t12. The opening / closing execution mode is terminated 10 times. In the opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 31 (e), the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode is a relatively long second opening period, and the opening / closing execution mode The interval period of is a relatively long second interval period, and the ending period of the open / close execution mode is a relatively long second ending period.

In the situation where the number of times of opening / closing execution mode is regulated per unit time as described above, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the game times that result in a 10R low probability jackpot occurs, and then the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is released when 80 game times are executed without a jackpot result occurring in the game state which is the started low probability mode and is the high frequency support mode, and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. That is, when the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode, the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0", so that the firing cycle of the game ball returns to the first cycle, which is the shortest firing cycle. , Return to the situation where the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times does not occur, the final stop period of the game times returns to the first final stop period, which is relatively short, and the opening period of the open / close execution mode is relatively short. The opening period is restored, the opening / closing execution mode interval period is returned to the relatively short first interval period, and the opening / closing execution mode ending period is returned to the relatively short first ending period.

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The larger the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64, the longer the firing cycle of the game ball. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes long. Become. As the firing cycle of the game balls becomes longer, the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

The firing cycle of the game ball gradually increases as the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c increases. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the more times it occurs, the more times it occurs. The firing cycle of the game ball becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

The firing cycle of the game ball is maintained at 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle, if the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is played five times occurs only once. As a result, it is possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from becoming excessive.

Even if the open / close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode or the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed, the total number of rounds counter 64c is not added. As a result, it is possible to prevent the regulation on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from occurring even when there is substantially no profit in granting the game balls. ..

Addition to the total number of rounds counter 64c is performed when the open / close execution mode ends, and does not occur in the middle of the open / close execution mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the firing cycle of the game ball from suddenly becoming long in the middle of the opening / closing execution mode.

The larger the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game times executed in the high frequency support mode. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is set. However, the fluctuation duration of the game times will be long. Then, as the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer, the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

The extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes gradually longer as the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c increases. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the more times it occurs, the more times it occurs. The fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of times the game is generated per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

The fluctuation duration of the game times is not extended only by the opening / closing execution mode of the high frequency winning mode in which the round games are played 5 times. This makes it possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of times of game occurrence per unit time from becoming excessive.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times fluctuates according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the various period tables and the processing modes of the period acquisition process (step S614) are used instead of being changed. The fluctuation duration of the game times acquired in the period acquisition process (step S614) is changed. As a result, it is possible to change the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the value of the total round number counter 64c while not changing the processing modes of the various period tables and the period acquisition process (step S614). Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the various period tables and the period acquisition process (step S614).

In the first extension process (step S1603) of the fluctuation duration period executed when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the period acquisition process (step S614) is performed. Regardless of the variable duration of the game times determined using the various period tables, the fixed first extension period is changed to the variable duration of the game times determined in the period acquisition process (step S614). to add. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for extending the fluctuation duration of the game times. This also applies to the second extension process of the fluctuation continuation period (step S1606) and the third extension process of the fluctuation continuation period (step S1609).

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended, the high-speed fluctuation display period in which the high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 becomes impossible or difficult in appearance is extended. As a result, it is possible to extend the fluctuation duration of the game times while not giving the player a sense of discomfort.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended, the data table for the game times production stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 83 is modified and displayed in accordance with the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times this time. The display data table stored in advance in the side ROM 93 is modified in accordance with the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times this time. As a result, it is not necessary to store the data table for the game rotation effect and the display data table corresponding to the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times in the ROMs 83 and 93 in advance. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times while suppressing the increase in the storage capacity required for the ROMs 83 and 93.

In a situation where the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the longest period is selected when a game number that is either a 10R low accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high accuracy jackpot result occurs, so that the frequency is low. If the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the support mode, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result and the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result The fluctuation duration of the game times, which is one of the above, becomes extremely long. Then, as the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer, it takes a long time until the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds, which is the high frequency winning mode, occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

Even if the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value, even if a game number that is either a 2R high-accuracy jackpot result or a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs, the fluctuation duration of the game number is The longest period is not selected, but a period shorter than the longest period is selected. As a result, the longest period is excessively selected as the fluctuation duration of the game times while delaying the occurrence of the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode and has the largest number of rounds, by extending the fluctuation duration of the game times. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

In the game times in which the fluctuation duration of the game times is the longest period, the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed on the symbol display device 41. When the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed, the remaining time for notifying the remaining time of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period to the upper left corner portion on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Image G3 is displayed. Since the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period ends when the fluctuation continuation period of the game times elapses, it can be said that the remaining time image G3 notifies the remaining time of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times. By displaying the remaining time image G3 in this way, when the fluctuation duration of the game times is the longest period, the player can grasp the remaining time of the fluctuation duration of the game times. , It is possible to alleviate the player's anxiety about the fact that the game round does not end easily.

When the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is started, the display of the remaining time image G3 is started. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds, which is the high frequency winning mode, is generated by starting the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period, and the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period can be recognized. It is possible to prevent the player's attention to the display of the remaining time from being lowered by the display of the remaining time image G3.

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the final stop period of the game times executed in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is set. However, the final suspension period of the game times will be longer. Then, as the final stop period of the game times becomes longer, the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

Opening / closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games Opening / closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games does not extend the final stop period of the game even if the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode occurs twice. When the mode occurs three times, the final stop period of the game times is extended. This makes it possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of times of game occurrence per unit time from becoming excessive.

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the opening period of the open / close execution mode generated in the high frequency support mode becomes long. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low frequency support mode, the opening period of the open / close execution mode Will be longer. Then, as the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode becomes longer, the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

The opening period of the open / close execution mode is not extended even if the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is played 10 times occurs twice, and the opening / closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is played 10 times. When the mode occurs three times, the opening period of the open / close execution mode is extended. As a result, it is possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the interval period of the open / close execution mode generated in the high frequency support mode becomes long. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low frequency support mode, the interval period of the open / close execution mode Will be longer. Then, as the interval period of the open / close execution mode becomes long, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

The interval period of the open / close execution mode is not extended even if the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is played 10 times occurs twice, and the open / close execution of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is played 10 times. When the mode occurs three times, the interval period of the open / close execution mode is extended. As a result, it is possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

Addition to the total number of rounds counter 64c is performed when the open / close execution mode ends, and does not occur in the middle of the open / close execution mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interval period from suddenly becoming long in the middle of the open / close execution mode.

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the ending period of the open / close execution mode generated in the high frequency support mode becomes long. As a result, if the open / close execution mode that becomes the high frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low frequency support mode, the ending period of the open / close execution mode Will be longer. Then, as the ending period of the open / close execution mode becomes long, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

The ending period of the open / close execution mode is not extended if the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is played 10 times occurs twice, and the opening / closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is played 10 times When the mode occurs three times, the ending period of the open / close execution mode is extended. As a result, it is possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time from becoming excessive.

When the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode ends, the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode is added to the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64, but the configuration is limited to this. However, when the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode is started, the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode may be added to the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Further, instead of the configuration, when the game round that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode ends, the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode is the total number of rounds counter of the main RAM 64. It may be configured to be added to 64c. As a result, it is possible to start the firing cycle of the game ball according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, and the extension of the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode at an early stage.

In addition, the number of round games that occur in the open / close execution mode is mainly the number of round games that occur in the middle of the game round that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode and before the final stop period of the game round is started. It may be configured to be added to the total number of rounds counter 64c of the side RAM 64. As a result, the firing cycle of the game ball, the final stop period of the game round, and the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode can be started early according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c. It will be possible.

In addition, when the game round that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode is started, the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode is added to the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64. It may be configured. As a result, the firing cycle of the game ball, the fluctuation duration of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, and the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode are extended according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c. Can be started early.

In addition, the round games to be added to the total number of rounds counter 64c are not limited to the round games in the opening / closing execution mode in the high frequency winning mode, and the opening / closing execution mode in the low frequency winning mode and the opening / closing in the high frequency winning mode. Any round game executed in any of the execution modes may be configured to be added to the total number of rounds counter 64c.

Further, all of the round games in the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode are not limited to the configuration to be added to the total number of rounds counter 64c, and the opening / closing execution mode by the maximum number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode. Round games may be added to the total number of rounds counter 64c, while other round games may not be added to the total number of rounds counter 64c. In addition, the round game in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result is subject to addition to the total round number counter 64c, while the other round games are not subject to addition to the total round number counter 64c. May be good.

Further, as the open continuation period of the round game, not only the long-term mode and the short-term mode but also the medium-term mode which is the period between these may exist. In this case, of the short-term mode round game, the medium-term mode round game, and the long-term mode round game, only the number of long-term round games is added to the total number of rounds counter 64c. The number of round games in the long-term mode and the number of round games in the medium-term mode may be added to the total number of rounds counter 64c, and the round game in the long-term mode, medium-term The round game as the aspect and the round game as the short-term aspect may be added to the total number of rounds counter 64c.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the parameters for generating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to discharge of a game ball that has flowed down the game area PA. In this embodiment, the following detection sensors 142a to 149a are provided instead of the various prize detection sensors 66a to 66e in the first embodiment.

Similar to the first embodiment, the game area PA is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, and an out port 24a. The game ball that has entered any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and supplied to the game area PA is any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. By entering the crab, it will be discharged from the game area PA. A game ball that has entered any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 142 to 148 are formed corresponding to each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. .. The game ball that has flowed into the discharge passage section 142-148 is guided to the lower end portion of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the flowed discharge passage section 142-148 to a discharge ball recovery section (not shown). Will be collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collection unit are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Various detection sensors 142a to 148a for detecting the game ball are provided in each discharge passage portion 142 to 148. The discharge passage portions 142 to 148 and the detection sensors 142a to 148a will be described below. Since four general winning openings 31 are provided, discharge passage portions 142 to 144 are present corresponding to each of the four general winning openings 31. In this case, one detection sensor 142a, one for each of the first discharge passage portion 142 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 143 corresponding to the rightmost general winning opening 31. 143a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 142a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the first discharge passage portion 142, and the detection range is provided in the middle position of the second discharge passage portion 143. The second winning opening detection sensor 143a is provided so as to exist. The game ball that has entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 142a on the way through the first discharge passage portion 142, and the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 31 to the right of the first winning opening detection sensor 142a. The ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 143a on the way through the second discharge passage portion 143. Further, a third discharge passage portion 144 formed so as to join the two general winning openings 31 on the right side at an intermediate position is provided. The third discharge passage portion 144 has an inlet side region corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and has one outlet side region when the inlet side regions merge in the middle. are doing. The third winning opening detection sensor 144a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the outlet side region in the third discharge passage portion 144. The game ball that has entered any of the two general winning openings 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 144a on the way through the third discharge passage portion 144.

The fourth discharge passage portion 145 exists corresponding to the special electric winning device 32. The special electric detection sensor 145a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the fourth discharge passage portion 145, and the game ball that has entered the special electric winning device 32 is on the way through the fourth discharge passage portion 145. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 145a. A fifth discharge passage portion 146 is present corresponding to the first operating port 33. The first operation port detection sensor 146a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the fifth discharge passage portion 146, and the game ball that has entered the first actuation port 33 uses the fifth discharge passage portion 146. It is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 146a on the way. A sixth discharge passage portion 147 exists corresponding to the second operating port 34. The second operating port detection sensor 147a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the sixth discharging passage portion 147, and the game ball that has entered the second operating port 34 uses the sixth discharging passage portion 147. It is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 147a on the way. The seventh discharge passage portion 148 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. The out-port detection sensor 148a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 148, and the game ball that has entered the out-port 24a is on the way through the seventh discharge passage portion 148. It is detected by the out port detection sensor 148a.

Note that the game ball detected by any one of the various detection sensors 142a to 148a is not the detection target of the other detection sensors 142a to 148a. Further, the gate detection sensor 149a is also provided for the through gate 35, and the game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 149a.

As the various detection sensors 142a to 149a, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used, but the sensors used are arbitrary as long as the game balls can be individually detected. Further, the various detection sensors 142a to 149a are electrically connected to the main MPU 62, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 142a to 149a are output to the main MPU 62. Specifically, the various detection sensors 142a to 149a output a LOW level signal when the game ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal when the game ball is detected. The relationship is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the main RAM 64 used for managing the payout rate. In this embodiment, the main RAM 64 is not provided with the total number of rounds counter 64c.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main RAM 64 is provided with a ball entry number area 150. The general winning counter 151, the special electric winning counter 152, the first operation counter 153, the second operation counter 154, and the out counter 155 are provided in the ball entry number area 150. The various counters 151 to 155 in the number of balls entered area 150 measure the number of balls entered in all the game states without distinguishing the game states. Specifically, the all-game states are a game state that is neither an open / close execution mode nor a high-frequency support mode, a game state that is an open / close execution mode, and a game state that is a high-frequency support mode.

The general winning counter 151 is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The special electric winning counter 152 is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The first operation counter 153 is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The second operation counter 154 is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The out counter 155 is a counter for measuring the number of game balls entering the out port 24a from a predetermined measurement start trigger.

The various counters 151 to 155 of the number of balls entered area 150 are used to measure the number of game balls entered into the target ball entry portions 24a and 31 to 34 when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. It will be used. Specifically, in all the gaming states described above, one game ball in the general winning opening 31 based on the detection results of the first winning opening detection sensor 142a, the second winning opening detection sensor 143a, and the third winning opening detection sensor 144a. When it is specified that the ball has entered, the value of the general winning counter 151 is added by 1, and based on the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 145a, it is specified that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32. In that case, the value of the special electric winning counter 152 is added by 1, and when it is specified that one game ball has entered the first operating port 33 based on the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 146a, When the value of the first operation counter 153 is added by 1 and it is specified that one game ball has entered the second operation port 34 based on the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 147a, the second operation is performed. The value of the counter 154 is added by 1, and when it is specified that one game ball has entered the out port 24a based on the detection result of the out port detection sensor 148a, the value of the out counter 155 is added by 1. ..

In addition to the number of balls entered area 150, the main RAM 64 is provided with a management area 160, a calculation area 171 and a write pointer 172. The payout rate for a predetermined period is calculated by using the management area 160, the calculation area 171 and the write pointer 172. The payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payouts to the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in all game states. When the values of various counters 151 to 155 in the number of balls entered area 150 are K1 to K5, the ball ejection rate is as follows.

Total number of game balls to be paid out (K1 x "Number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K2 x "Number of winning balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K3 x "Prize for winning the first operating port 33" The ratio of "number of balls" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5).

The management area 160 is provided with 60 storage areas 161 to 166 for storing information on the unit payout rate when 100 game balls, which is a predetermined number of units, are discharged from the game area PA. .. That is, the management area 160 is provided with the first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166. The first to sixth storage areas 161 to 166 all have the same storage capacity, and each has a storage capacity capable of storing information on the unit payout rate.

The calculation area 171 calculates information on the unit payout rate when 100 game balls, which are a predetermined number of units, are discharged from the game area PA, using the values of various counters 151 to 155 of the number of incoming balls area 150. Used in cases. The write pointer 172 is a counter for enabling the main MPU 62 to grasp the storage areas 161 to 166 to which the unit payout rate is written among the first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 of the management area 160. is there. When a new unit payout rate is calculated by ejecting 100 game balls, which is a predetermined number of units, from the game area PA, the first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 of the management area 160 The new unit payout rate information is overwritten on the storage areas 161 to 166 corresponding to the value of the write pointer 172, and then the value of the write pointer 172 is added by 1. In this case, the value of the write pointer 172 takes a value of "0" to "59", and when the value of the write pointer 172 is "n", a new unit is ejected to the n + 1 storage area in the management area 160. The rate information is overwritten. Further, as a result of adding 1 to the value of the write pointer 172, when the maximum value of the write pointer 172 is exceeded, the write pointer 172 is cleared to "0".

As described above, the management area 160 is provided with 60 storage areas 161 to 166 capable of storing information on the unit payout rate when 100 game balls, which are a predetermined number of game balls, are discharged from the game area PA. There is. Therefore, when the information on the unit payout rate is stored in all of the 1st to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 of the management area 160, 6000 game balls, which is the calculation reference number, are released from the game area PA. The information that enables the calculation of the information on the target payout rate in the case of being discharged is stored in the management area 160. Each time 100 game balls, which is a predetermined number of units, are ejected from the game area PA, the main MPU 62 calculates the unit payout rate corresponding to the ejection of the 100 game balls, and calculates the unit ball ejection rate of the management area 160. Of the 1st to 60th storage areas 161 to 166, the storage areas 161 to 166 indicated by the write pointer 172 are not only overwritten with the information of the unit payout rate, but also the 1st to 60th storage areas immediately after the overwriting is performed. By adding the information of all the unit payout rates stored in 161 to 166 and dividing the addition result by "60" which is the number of the storage areas 161 to 166, the calculation reference number of game balls is discharged. Calculate the target payout rate. Then, the calculated target ball ejection rate information is overwritten on the target ball ejection rate area 173 provided in the main RAM 64. In the present embodiment, the information of the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 serves as a parameter for giving an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a ball ejection rate monitoring process executed by the main MPU 62. The ball output rate monitoring process is executed by the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10).

When the front door frame 14 is not in the open state (step S1901: NO), the ball entry management process is executed (step S1902). FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the ball entry management process.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 142a (step S2001: YES), that is, the signal received from the first winning opening detection sensor 142a is cut from the LOW level to the HI level. When it is confirmed that the change has been made, when it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 143a (step S2003: YES), that is, the signal received from the second winning opening detection sensor 143a. When it is confirmed that the LOW level has been switched to the HI level, or when it is determined that one game ball is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 144a (step S2005: YES), that is, the third winning opening When it is confirmed that the signal received from the detection sensor 144a has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the value of the general winning counter 151 is added by 1 (step S2002, step S2004, step S2006). In the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 10), the detection results of the first to third winning opening detection sensors 142a to 144a are also monitored, and the first to third winning opening detection sensors 142a to 144a are monitored. If it is determined that one game ball is detected in any of the above, a process is executed so that the number of game balls corresponding to the general winning opening 31 is paid out.

When it was determined that one game ball was detected by the special electric detection sensor 145a (step S2007: YES), that is, it was confirmed that the signal received from the special electric detection sensor 145a was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. In this case, the value of the special electric winning counter 152 is added by 1 (step S2008). In addition, when the detection result of the special electric power detection sensor 145a is also monitored in the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 10) and it is determined that one game ball is detected by the special electric power detection sensor 145a, A process for ensuring that the number of game balls corresponding to the special electric winning device 32 is paid out is executed, and a process for specifying the end timing of the round game is executed.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 146a (step S2009: YES), that is, the signal received from the first operating port detection sensor 146a is cut from the LOW level to the HI level. When it is confirmed that the change has been made, the value of the first operation counter 153 is added by 1 (step S2010). In the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 146a is also monitored, and one game ball is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 146a. If it is determined that the number of game balls has been determined to be the same, a process is executed to ensure that the number of game balls corresponding to the first operating port 33 is paid out, and a process is executed to specify an opportunity to acquire the reserved information on the first special drawing side. To do.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 147a (step S2011: YES), that is, the signal received from the second operating port detection sensor 147a is cut from the LOW level to the HI level. When it is confirmed that the change has been made, the value of the second operation counter 154 is added by 1 (step S2012). In the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 147a is also monitored, and one game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 147a. If it is determined that the number of game balls has been determined to be the same, a process for ensuring that the number of game balls corresponding to the second operating port 34 is paid out is executed, and a process for specifying an opportunity for acquiring the reserved information on the second special drawing side is executed. To do.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the out-port detection sensor 148a (step S2013: YES), that is, the signal received from the out-port detection sensor 148a is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If confirmed, the value of the out counter 155 is added by 1 (step S2014). In the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), the detection result of the out port detection sensor 148a is not monitored.

By executing the ball entry management process as described above, the number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 is measured using the general winning counter 151, and the game balls are entered into the special electric winning device 32. The number is measured using the special electric winning counter 152, the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 is measured using the first operating counter 153, and the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 is measured. The number of balls is measured using the second operation counter 154, and the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is measured using the out counter 155. As a result, it becomes possible for the main MPU 62 to grasp the history of ball entry into each of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34.

Returning to the description of the payout rate monitoring process (FIG. 34), when an affirmative determination is made in step S1901 or when the process of step S1902 is executed, the calculation process of the total number of ejected pieces is executed (step S1903). In the calculation process of the total number of ejected balls, the value of the general winning counter 151, the value of the special electric winning counter 152, the value of the first operating counter 153, the value of the second operating counter 154, and the value of the out counter 155 in the number of incoming balls area 150 Calculate the sum of the values. The result of the calculation is the current total number of emissions. Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated current total emission number is "100" or more, which is a predetermined unit number (step S1904). If the current total number of discharged balls is less than the predetermined number of units (step S1904: NO), the current ball ejection rate monitoring process is terminated as it is.

When the current total number of ejected units is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of units (step S1904: YES), the calculation process of the unit payout rate is executed (step S1905). Specifically, when the values of the various counters 151 to 155 of the number of balls entered area 150 are set to K1 to K5,
Total number of game balls paid out (K1 x "Number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K2 x "Number of winning balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K3 x "Prize for winning the first operating port 33" The ratio of "number of balls" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) is calculated. In this calculation, the calculation area 171 is used.

The calculated unit payout rate information is overwritten in the storage areas 161 to 166 indicated by the value of the write pointer 172 among the first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 of the management area 160 (step S1906). After that, the update process of the write pointer 172 is executed (step S1907). In the update process, the value of the write pointer 172 is added by 1, and when the value after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the write pointer 172, the write pointer 172 is cleared to "0".

After that, the information of all the unit payout rates stored in the 1st to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 in the management area 160 is added (step S1908), and the total value after the addition is added to the management area 160. Divide by "60", which is the number of storage areas 161 to 166 (step S1909). Then, the information of the numerical value obtained by multiplying the division result by 100 is overwritten in the target payout rate area 173 as the target payout rate information (step S1910). The information on the target payout rate is binary information, but is represented as numerical information in the range of "0%" to "999%" in decimal display. In this case, when the target payout rate is "100%", the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA and the game when 6000 game balls, which is the calculation reference number, are discharged from the game area PA. It means that the total number of balls paid out is the same. When the target ball output rate is less than "100%", the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA when the calculation reference number of 6000 game balls is discharged from the game area PA is the game ball. It means that it is more than the total number of payouts. When the target payout rate exceeds "100%", the total number of game balls to be paid out when the calculation reference number of 6000 game balls is discharged from the game area PA is the game discharged from the game area PA. It means that it is more than the total number of spheres. After that, each of the general winning counter 151, the special electric winning counter 152, the first operating counter 153, the second operating counter 154, and the out counter 155 in the entry number area 150 is cleared to "0" (step S1911).

By executing the ball output rate monitoring process (FIG. 34) as described above, every time 100 game balls, which is a predetermined unit number, are discharged from the game area PA, the calculation reference number is 6000. The target payout rate for the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is calculated. This makes it possible to calculate the target payout rate each time a predetermined number of game balls are ejected from the game area PA.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a cycle setting process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is less than the first reference value (step S2101). The first reference value is set to "134%". When the value of the target payout rate is less than the first reference value (step S2101: YES). Information corresponding to the first cycle that enables firing of 100 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2102). The first cycle is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfaction signal from the firing control unit 78c, the first cycle A launch instruction signal is transmitted to the launch control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation is such that the number of rotations is increased, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the first cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the value of the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value ( Step S2103). The second reference value is set to "200%". When the value of the target payout rate is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2103: YES). Information corresponding to the second cycle that enables firing of 90 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2104). The second cycle is about 0.67 seconds, which is the second shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfaction signal from the firing control unit 78c, the second cycle A launch instruction signal is transmitted to the launch control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation is such that the number of rotations is increased, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined whether or not the value of the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value ( Step S2105). The third reference value is set to "300%". When the value of the target payout rate is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2105: YES). Information corresponding to the third cycle that enables the firing of 80 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2106). The third cycle is 0.75 seconds, which is the second longest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the third cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfaction signal from the firing control unit 78c, the third cycle A launch instruction signal is transmitted to the launch control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the third cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation is such that the number of rotations is increased, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the third cycle elapses.

When the value of the target payout rate is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S2105: NO). Information corresponding to the fourth cycle, which enables the firing of 70 game balls per minute, is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2107). The fourth cycle is about 0.86 seconds, which is the longest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the 4th cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfaction signal from the firing control unit 78c, the 4th cycle A launch instruction signal is transmitted to the launch control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the fourth cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation is such that the amount of rotation is such that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the fourth cycle elapses.

As described above, the larger the value of the target ball output rate, the longer the firing cycle of the game ball. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes long. Become. As the firing cycle of the game balls becomes longer, the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

The firing cycle of the game ball becomes longer step by step as the value of the target ball ejection rate increases. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the more times it occurs, the more times it occurs. The firing cycle of the game ball becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

Every time 100 game balls, which is a predetermined unit number, are ejected from the game area PA, the target payout rate when 6000 game balls, which is the calculation reference number up to that point, is ejected from the game area PA, is calculated. Will be done. Then, the firing cycle of the game ball is changed according to the calculated value of the target ball ejection rate. As a result, it is possible to appropriately change the firing cycle of the game ball according to the change in the value of the target ball ejection rate even during the opening / closing execution mode or the game round.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

When the current hit / fail judgment result is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S2201: YES), the current hit / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result trigger the execution of the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode. It is determined whether or not the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value, which is either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result (step S2202). .. The third reference value is the reference value of the largest number among the reference values set for a plurality of types, and is "300%" as already explained.

If this time is either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result and the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S2202: YES), the present The longest period among the fluctuation durations of the plurality of types of game times set in the pachinko machine 10 is selected as the fluctuation duration of the current game times (step S2204). The longest period is longer than the longest fluctuation duration among the fluctuation durations set in the first per-hour period table as in the first embodiment. That is, the longest period acquired in step S2204 is longer than any of the variable durations of the game times selected in other situations. Therefore, whichever of the 10R low probability jackpot result and the 10R high probability jackpot result, the period during which the fluctuation duration of the game times is the longest when the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value. It becomes. When the longest period is selected, the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times does not occur, and when the longest period is selected as the fluctuation duration of the game times, it is dedicated to the longest period including various images G1 to G3. The point that the movie image is displayed is also the same as that of the first embodiment.

In the situation where the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value as described above, when a game round that is either a 10R low accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high accuracy jackpot result occurs. By selecting the longest period, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode occurring. The fluctuation duration of the game times, which is either the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, becomes extremely long. Then, as the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer, it takes a long time until the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds, which is the high frequency winning mode, occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

When the process of step S2204 is executed, after transmitting the variation command including the information of the longest period and the type command including the current pass / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S2215). ), The period adjustment process is executed (step S2216). However, in the period adjustment process after executing the process of step S2204, the extension of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times does not occur.

Even if this time is either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result, if the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is less than the third reference value, and the target ball output rate area Even if the target ball output rate stored in 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value, if this time is either a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, a 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, or a small hit result, step S2203 is performed. Read the hit-time period table from the main ROM 63. The contents of the hit-time period table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The processing content of steps S2205 to S2213 is the same as that of steps S605 to S613 in the acquisition processing of the fluctuation duration period (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment. Further, the contents of the reach time period table, the normal use period table, and the shortening period table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

When the hit time period table is read in step S2203, when the reach time period table is read in step S2206, when the normal time period table is read in step S2209, the shortening period table is read in step S2210. When it is read, when the normal period table is read in step S2212, or when the shortened period table is read in step S2213, the period acquisition process is executed (step S2214). In the period acquisition process, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is acquired. Then, by collating the acquired numerical information of the variation type counter CS with the period table read out as described above, the variation continuation period of the current game times is acquired.

When the process of step S2204 is executed, or when the process of step S2214 is executed, the change command including the information of the change duration of the game times acquired this time, and the type including the present / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result The command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2215). The data structure of these variable commands and type commands is the same as that of the first embodiment. After that, the period adjustment process is executed (step S2216).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the period adjustment process in the present embodiment.

In the period adjustment process, when the longest period has already been selected as the variable duration of the game times this time (step S2301: YES), the process for extending the variable duration of the game times shown in steps S2302 and subsequent steps is not executed. In the situation where the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value, when a game number that results in a big hit occurs, in step S2204 in the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration (FIG. 37). Therefore, the longest period is selected as the fluctuation duration of this game. In this case, if the longest period has already been selected, the process for extending the fluctuation duration of the game times shown in steps S2302 and subsequent steps is not executed, so that the fluctuation duration of the game times is long. It is possible to prevent the conversion from being cumulatively executed for the fluctuation duration of one game.

In a situation where the fluctuation duration of the game times is not the longest period (step S2301: NO), the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the first reference value and less than the second reference value. If (step S2302: YES), the first extension process of the fluctuation duration period is executed (step S2303). In the first extension process, similarly to step S1603 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, with respect to the variation continuation period acquired in step S2214 in the variation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 37). Add 1 second as the first extension period. Further, a first extension command indicating that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the first extension period is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2304). When the sound light side MPU 82 receives the first extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the first extension period, and the data table for the game times production corresponding to the extension. Correct the contents of. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment. The first reference value is "134%" as already explained, and the second reference value is "200%" as already explained.

In a situation where the fluctuation duration of the game times is not the longest period (step S2301: NO), the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the second reference value and less than the third reference value. If (step S2305: YES), the second extension process of the fluctuation duration period is executed (step S2306). In the second extension process, similarly to step S1606 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, with respect to the variation continuation period acquired in step S2214 in the variation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 37). Add 2 seconds as the second extension period. Further, a second extension command indicating that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the second extension period is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2307). When the sound light side MPU 82 receives the second extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the second extension period, and the data table for the game times production corresponding to the extension. Correct the contents of. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment. The third reference value is "300%" as already explained.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is not the longest period (step S2301: NO) and the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S2308: YES). ), The third extension process of the fluctuation duration period is executed (step S2309). In the third extension process, similarly to step S1609 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, with respect to the variation continuation period acquired in step S2214 in the variation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 37). Add 3 seconds as the third extension period. In addition, a third extension command indicating that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the third extension period is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2310). When the sound light side MPU 82 receives the third extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the third extension period, and also has a data table for the game times production corresponding to the extension. Correct the contents of. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment.

As described above, the larger the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game times executed in the high frequency support mode. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is set. However, the fluctuation duration of the game times will be long. Then, as the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer, the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

The extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes gradually longer as the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 increases. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the more times it occurs, the more times it occurs. The fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of times the game is generated per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

Every time 100 game balls, which is a predetermined unit number, are ejected from the game area PA, the target payout rate when 6000 game balls, which is the calculation reference number up to that point, is ejected from the game area PA, is calculated. Will be done. Then, the mode of extending the fluctuation duration of the game times is changed according to the calculated value of the target payout rate. As a result, the game times are repeatedly executed in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the game times are repeatedly executed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. In a normal game state, which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, it is possible to appropriately change the extension mode of the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the change in the value of the target ball output rate. In this case, the extension mode of the fluctuation duration of the game times can be changed without triggering the start or end of the open / close execution mode.

Even in this embodiment, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode are appropriately changed. Specifically, as the final stop period of the game round, the first final stop period (0.5 seconds) is selected if the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is less than the second reference value. If the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the second final stop period (3 seconds) is selected. Further, as for the opening period of the open / close execution mode, if the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 is less than the second reference value, the first opening period (4 seconds) is selected and the target ball ejection rate area. If the target payout rate stored in 173 is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the second opening period (10 seconds) is selected. Further, as the interval period of the open / close execution mode, if the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 is less than the second reference value, the first interval period (2 seconds) is selected, and the target ball ejection rate area If the target payout rate stored in 173 is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the second interval period (6 seconds) is selected. As for the ending period of the open / close execution mode, if the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 is less than the second reference value, the first ending period (6 seconds) is selected and the target ball ejection rate area. If the target payout rate stored in 173 is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the second ending period (12 seconds) is selected.

As described above, when the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode, and the opening / closing are performed. The ending period of the execution mode becomes longer. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the open / close execution is executed per unit time. The number of times the mode occurs is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which various periods are changed according to the target payout rate, and various periods may be changed according to any one of the following first to seventh parameters. Good. Specifically, when the values of the various counters 151 to 155 in the ball entry number area 150 are set to K1 to K5, the first to seventh parameters are as follows.
1st parameter: Total number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 K1 / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5).
-Second parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 K2 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5).
Third parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 K3 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5).
Fourth parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entered into the second operating port 34 K4 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5).
Fifth parameter: (K1 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32") / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA The ratio of (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5).
-Sixth parameter: (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K1 x "general""Number of prize balls for winning the prize opening 31" + K2 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K4 x "Second operating port 34" The ratio of "the number of prize balls to the prize").
7th parameter: K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K1 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K2 x "special electric winning device 32" The ratio of "number of prize balls for winning a prize" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the first operating port 33" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the second operating port 34").

Further, the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 may be notified. Specifically, a plurality of 7-segment displays may be mounted on the main control board 61, and the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 may be displayed on the plurality of 7-segment displays. Good. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the target payout rate. In the configuration in which any of the first to seventh parameters is used instead of the target payout rate, the parameter to be used may be notified.

Further, the predetermined number of units is not limited to "100", and may be a number larger than "100" or less than "100". For example, the predetermined number of units may be "1000". In this case, information on the unit payout rate when 1000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA is stored in each of the 1st to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 of the management area 160. ..

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the parameters for generating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 39 (a) is a flowchart showing a process during special figure determination in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the final stop period of the current game round has elapsed (step S2401). If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the process of determining the special figure is terminated as it is.

When the final stop period of the current game round has passed (step S2401: YES), the winning / failing judgment result that triggered the current game round is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S2402: YES), execute the process for shifting to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, first, the selection process of the opening period is executed (step S2403). As the target period of the opening period, two types of 4 seconds (first opening period) and 10 seconds (second opening period) are set as in the first embodiment, and these are set in the opening period selection process. Of the two types of periods, select the side that will be the opening period of this open / close execution mode.

After that, the information of the opening period selected in step S2403 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S2404). As a result, the measurement of the opening period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time is started.

After that, an opening command including the information of the opening period selected this time is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2405). By receiving the opening command, the sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode of this time and starts measuring the opening period, and displays the opening effect corresponding to the opening period of this time. The light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed in the part 54. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the opening effect corresponding to the current opening period.

After that, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing determination result that triggered the game round is either a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, a 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result (step S2406). That is, it is determined whether or not the game is a game that triggers the occurrence of the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2406, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 provided in the main RAM 64 is set to 1 as shown in the explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area of the main RAM 64 in FIG. 39 (b). Add (step S2407). That is, in the present embodiment, the main RAM 64 is not provided with the total number of rounds counter 64c, and instead, the opening / closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode executed without the game times in the low frequency support mode occurring. A villa counter 181 for measuring the number of times is provided.

When a negative determination is made in step S2406 or the process of step S2407 is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S2408). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process to the one corresponding to the special figure start process.

On the other hand, when the winning / failing judgment result that triggered the game round is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S2402: NO), the high probability flag of the main RAM 64 is "0" and high frequency support is provided. By determining whether or not the flag is "1", it is a low-probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode triggered by the result of the 10R low-probability jackpot in the game times ended this time, and the frequency is high. It is determined whether or not the game is executed in the support mode (step S2409).

In the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (step S2409: YES), the value of the game count counter of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S2410). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the game count counter after the 1 subtraction is "0", the game rounds of the end reference number of times are executed in the situation of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not (step S2411). When the value of the game count counter is "0" (step S2411: YES), the high frequency support flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S2412). As a result, the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are set.

After that, the consecutive villa counter 181 of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S2413). That is, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is not cleared to "0" even when the high probability mode is changed to the low probability mode, but is cleared to "0" when the high frequency support mode is changed to the low frequency support mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S2409, a negative determination is made in step S2411, or the process of step S2413 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S2414). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure determination processing to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

The addition process to the consecutive villa counter 181 (step S2407) is executed only when either the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs as described above. The support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode in which any of the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, and the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs becomes the high-frequency support mode. Further, as described above, when the support mode is changed from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode in step S2412 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 39), the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is cleared to "0". The transition from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode in a situation other than the open / close execution mode is executed only in step S2412 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 39). Therefore, the consecutive villa counter 181 is incremented by 1 when the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode that triggers the transition from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode occurs, and is subsequently in the low-probability mode. 1 is added when the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode occurs before the game round in the low frequency support mode is started. That is, in the consecutive villa counter 181, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode executed without interposing the game times in the low frequency support mode is measured.

Here, even if the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained in the high-frequency support mode and the open / close execution mode by the low-frequency winning mode based on the result is executed, the addition of the consecutive villa counter 181 does not occur. Further, even if a small hit result is obtained in the high frequency support mode and the opening / closing execution mode similar to the low frequency winning mode based on the result is executed, the addition of the consecutive villa counter 181 does not occur. As a result, the payout of the game ball is substantially executed, in other words, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode in which the player is substantially benefited is measured by the consecutive villa counter 181.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a cycle setting process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 of the main RAM 64 is less than the first reference value (step S2501). The first reference value is set to "2". That is, even if the opening / closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode occurs triggered by either the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 remains. The first reference value is not reached, and in the subsequent high-frequency support mode, the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode is triggered by either the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result. Reoccurs, and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 reaches the first reference value.

When the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is less than the first reference value (step S2501: YES). Information corresponding to the first cycle that enables firing of 100 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2502). The first cycle is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfaction signal from the firing control unit 78c, the first cycle A launch instruction signal is transmitted to the launch control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation is such that the number of rotations is increased, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the first cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2503). The second reference value is set to "4". That is, in the low-frequency support mode, the opening / closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode occurs triggered by either the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, and then in the high-frequency support mode thereafter. With either the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode occurs three times, and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 becomes the second reference value. To reach.

When the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2503: YES). Information corresponding to the second cycle that enables firing of 90 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2504). The second cycle is about 0.67 seconds, which is the second shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfaction signal from the firing control unit 78c, the second cycle A launch instruction signal is transmitted to the launch control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation is such that the number of rotations is increased, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S2503, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2505). The third reference value is set to "6". That is, in the low-frequency support mode, the opening / closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode occurs triggered by either the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, and then in the high-frequency support mode thereafter. With either the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, the open / close execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode occurs five times, and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 becomes the third reference value. To reach.

When the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2505: YES). Information corresponding to the third cycle that enables the firing of 80 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2506). The third cycle is 0.75 seconds, which is the second longest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the third cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfaction signal from the firing control unit 78c, the third cycle A launch instruction signal is transmitted to the launch control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the third cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation is such that the number of rotations is increased, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the third cycle elapses.

When the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S2505: NO). Information corresponding to the fourth cycle, which enables the firing of 70 game balls per minute, is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2507). The fourth cycle is about 0.86 seconds, which is the longest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the 4th cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfaction signal from the firing control unit 78c, the 4th cycle A launch instruction signal is transmitted to the launch control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the fourth cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation is such that the amount of rotation is such that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the fourth cycle elapses.

As described above, the larger the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is, the longer the firing cycle of the game ball is. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes long. Become. Then, as the firing cycle of the game balls becomes longer, the number of game balls to the game area PA per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

The firing cycle of the game ball gradually increases as the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 increases. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the more times it occurs, the more times it occurs. The firing cycle of the game ball becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

The firing cycle of the game ball is maintained at 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle, if the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode occurs only once. As a result, it is possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from becoming excessive.

Even if the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode or the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed, the addition to the consecutive villa counter 181 is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the regulation on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from occurring even when there is substantially no profit in granting the game balls. ..

The addition to the consecutive villa counter 181 is performed before the opening / closing execution mode is started, and does not occur in the middle of the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the firing cycle of the game ball from being suddenly delayed in the middle of the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, since the addition to the consecutive villa counter 181 is performed before the start of the open / close execution mode, the launch cycle of the game ball corresponding to the reference value is set from the start of the open / close execution mode that triggers the arrival of each reference value. Be changed. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from the start of the open / close execution mode that triggers the arrival of each reference value.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

When the current hit / fail judgment result is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S2601: YES), the current win / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result trigger the execution of the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode. It is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value in either the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result (step S2602). The third reference value is the reference value of the largest number among the reference values set for a plurality of types, and is "6" as already explained.

If this time is either the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S2602: YES), the pachinko machine 10 is set. The longest period among the fluctuation continuation periods of the plurality of types of game times is selected as the fluctuation continuation period of the current game times (step S2604). The longest period is longer than the longest fluctuation duration among the fluctuation durations set in the first per-hour period table as in the first embodiment. That is, the longest period acquired in step S2604 is longer than any of the variable durations of the game times selected in other situations. Therefore, the duration of fluctuation of the game times is the longest period when the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value in either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result. When the longest period is selected, the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times does not occur, and when the longest period is selected as the fluctuation duration of the game times, it is dedicated to the longest period including various images G1 to G3. The point that the movie image is displayed is also the same as that of the first embodiment.

As described above, in the situation where the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the longest period is selected when a game number that is either a 10R low accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high accuracy jackpot result occurs. If the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the 10R low probability jackpot result and the 10R high The fluctuation duration of the game times, which is one of the probable jackpot results, becomes extremely long. Then, as the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer, it takes a long time until the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds, which is the high frequency winning mode, occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

When the process of step S2604 is executed, after transmitting the variation command including the information of the longest period and the type command including the current pass / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S2615). ), The period adjustment process is executed (step S2616). However, in the period adjustment process after executing the process of step S2604, the extension of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times does not occur.

Even if this time is either the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is less than the third reference value, and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is greater than or equal to the third reference value. Even if there is, if this time is either a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, a 2R high-accuracy jackpot result, or a small hit result, the hit-time period table is read from the main ROM 63 in step S2603. The contents of the hit-time period table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The processing content of steps S265 to S2613 is the same as that of steps S605 to S613 in the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration period (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment. Further, the contents of the reach time period table, the normal use period table, and the shortening period table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

When the hit time period table is read in step S2603, when the reach time period table is read in step S2606, when the normal time period table is read in step S2609, the shortening period table is read in step S2610. When read, when the normal period table is read in step S2612, or when the shortened period table is read in step S2613, the period acquisition process is executed (step S2614). In the period acquisition process, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is acquired. Then, by collating the acquired numerical information of the variation type counter CS with the period table read out as described above, the variation continuation period of the current game times is acquired.

When the process of step S2604 is executed, or when the process of step S2614 is executed, the change command including the information of the change duration of the game times acquired this time, and the type including the current hit / fail judgment result and the distribution judgment result. The command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2615). The data structure of these variable commands and type commands is the same as that of the first embodiment. After that, the period adjustment process is executed (step S2616).

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the period adjustment process in the present embodiment.

In the period adjustment process, if the longest period has already been selected as the variable duration of the game times this time (step S2701: YES), the process for extending the variable duration of the game times shown in steps S2702 and subsequent steps is not executed. As described above, when a game number that results in a big hit occurs in a situation where the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the current game is performed in step S2604 in the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration (FIG. 41). The longest period is selected as the duration of the change. In this case, when the longest period is selected, the process for extending the fluctuation duration of the game times shown in step S2702 and subsequent steps is not executed, so that the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended. Can be prevented from being executed cumulatively for the fluctuation duration of one game.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is not the longest period (step S2701: NO) and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2702: YES). ), The first extension process of the fluctuation duration period is executed (step S2703). In the first extension process, similarly to step S1603 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, with respect to the variation continuation period acquired in step S2614 in the variation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 41). Add 1 second as the first extension period. In addition, a first extension command indicating that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the first extension period is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2704). When the sound light side MPU 82 receives the first extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the first extension period, and the data table for the game times production corresponding to the extension. Correct the contents of. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment. The first reference value is "2" as described above, and the second reference value is "4" as described above.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is not the longest period (step S2701: NO), and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or more than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2705: YES). ), The second extension process of the fluctuation duration period is executed (step S2706). In the second extension process, similarly to step S1606 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the fluctuation continuation period acquired in step S2614 in the acquisition process of the variation continuation period (FIG. 41) Add 2 seconds as the second extension period. In addition, a second extension command indicating that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the second extension period is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2707). When the sound light side MPU 82 receives the second extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the second extension period, and the data table for the game times production corresponding to the extension. Correct the contents of. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment. The third reference value is "6" as already explained.

When the fluctuation duration of the game times is not the longest period (step S2701: NO) and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S2708: YES), the third fluctuation duration is The extension process is executed (step S2709). In the second extension process, similarly to step S1609 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, with respect to the variation continuation period acquired in step S2614 in the variation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 41). Add 3 seconds as the third extension period. In addition, a third extension command indicating that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the third extension period is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2710). When the sound light side MPU 82 receives the third extension command, it grasps that the fluctuation duration of the current game times has been extended by the third extension period, and also has a data table for the game times production corresponding to the extension. Correct the contents of. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment.

As described above, the larger the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game times executed in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is set. However, the fluctuation duration of the game times will be long. Then, as the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer, the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

The extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times increases stepwise as the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 increases. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the more times it occurs, the more times it occurs. The fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of times the game is generated per unit time according to the amount of profit given to the player.

The fluctuation duration of the game times is not extended even if the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode occurs only once. This makes it possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of times of game occurrence per unit time from becoming excessive.

Even if the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode or the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed, the addition to the consecutive villa counter 181 is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the regulation on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from occurring even when there is substantially no profit in granting the game balls. ..

Even in this embodiment, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode are appropriately changed. Specifically, for the final stop period of the game round, if the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is less than the second reference value, the first final stop period (0.5 seconds) is selected, and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is set. If it is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the second final stop period (3 seconds) is selected. Further, as for the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, if the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is less than the second reference value, the first opening period (4 seconds) is selected, and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or more than the second reference value. If so, the second opening period (10 seconds) is selected. Further, as for the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode, if the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is less than the second reference value, the first interval period (2 seconds) is selected, and when the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or more than the second reference value. If so, the second interval period (6 seconds) is selected. As for the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode, if the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is less than the second reference value, the first ending period (6 seconds) is selected, and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or more than the second reference value. If so, the second ending period (12 seconds) is selected.

As described above, when the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode become longer. .. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the open / close execution is executed per unit time. The number of times the mode occurs is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

The value of the consecutive villa counter 181 of the main RAM 64 is added when the opening / closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode is started, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the opening / closing by the high-frequency winning mode is not limited to this. The value of the consecutive villa counter 181 may be added when the game round that triggers the transition to the execution mode ends.

Further, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 may be added in the middle of the game round that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode and before the final stop period of the game round is started. .. As a result, it is possible to start the firing cycle of the game ball, the final stop period of the game times, and the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode at an early stage according to the value of the consecutive villa counter 181. It becomes.

Further, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 may be added when the game round that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode is started. As a result, the firing cycle of the game ball, the fluctuation duration of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, and the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode can be extended according to the value of the consecutive villa counter 181. It will be possible to start early.

Further, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 may be added in the middle of the opening / closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode after the opening period is started or when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

Further, the opening / closing execution mode to be added to the consecutive villa counter 181 is not limited to the opening / closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode, and the opening / closing execution mode by either the low frequency winning mode or the high frequency winning mode is continuous. It may be configured to be added to the villa counter 181.

Further, all of the opening / closing execution modes by the high frequency winning mode are not limited to the configuration to be added to the consecutive villa counter 181. In the high frequency winning mode, the opening / closing execution mode by the maximum number of rounds is the consecutive villa counter. While it is subject to addition to 181, other open / close execution modes may be configured so that it is not subject to addition to the consecutive villa counter 181. Further, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result may be added to the consecutive villa counter 181, while the other opening / closing execution modes may not be added to the consecutive villa counter 181.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for lengthening the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 43A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the base sequence table 182.

The base sequence table 182 is stored in advance in the main ROM 63. In the base array table 182, index information is set in which the minimum value is "0" and the maximum value is "n", and the fluctuation duration of the game times is set corresponding to each index information. .. In the base sequence table 182, all the fluctuation durations of the game times that can be acquired in the situation where the period adjustment process (step S616) is not executed in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) are set, and the index information of a large value is set. The fluctuation duration of the game times for a reasonably long period is associated. In FIG. 43 (a), the index information of "0" is associated with the fluctuation duration of 2 seconds, and the index information of "1" is associated with the fluctuation duration of 3 seconds. The index information of "k" is associated with a fluctuation duration of 15 seconds, and the index information of "n-1" is associated with a fluctuation duration of 9 minutes. The index information of "" is associated with a fluctuation duration of 10 minutes.

When the longest period is selected as the variation duration of the game times in step S604 in the acquisition process of the variation duration (FIG. 14), the index information of "n" in the base sequence table 182 is stored in the register of the main MPU 62. To. Further, when the period acquisition process is executed in step S614 in the change continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14), the index information corresponding to the various read period tables and the acquired change type counter CS is mainly used. It is stored in the register of the side MPU 62. The main MPU 62 grasps the fluctuation duration of the game times by collating the index information stored in the register with the base sequence table 182. In addition, this stored index information is set as data corresponding to the fluctuation duration in the fluctuation command. The same table as the base arrangement table 182 stored in advance in the main ROM 63 is stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 83, and the sound light side MPU 82 is set as a variable command by referring to the table. Grasp the fluctuation duration of the game times corresponding to the index information.

FIG. 43B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the additional sequence table 183.

The additional sequence table 183 is stored in advance in the main ROM 63. In the additional array table 183, index information is set in which the minimum value is "0" and the serial number is changed to the maximum value of "n". The number of index information and the numerical values that can be taken as index information are the same as those of the base sequence table 182.

In the additional sequence table 183, an additional period for extending the fluctuation duration of the game times is set corresponding to each index information. When the variation continuation period of the game times is extended in the period adjustment process (step S616) in the variation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14), it is in the stage before the period adjustment process (step S616) is executed. An additional period set in the additional sequence table 183 corresponding to the index information corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the game is added to the acquired fluctuation duration of the game.

As shown in FIG. 43 (b), the additional period set in the additional sequence table 183 is not constant and differs depending on the index information. Specifically, a longer additional period is set for the index information contained in a predetermined numerical range that is larger than the small numerical range compared to the index information contained in the small numerical range that continues from the minimum value. .. That is, the fluctuation duration of the game times included in the predetermined period range, which is longer than the short period range, is longer than the fluctuation duration of the game times included in the short period range from the shortest period. Will be set. However, 0 seconds is set as the additional period for the index information having a predetermined value or more, and the additional period is not substantially set. As a result, the period is not extended for the long fluctuation duration of the game that is longer than the predetermined period. Specifically, regarding the additional period set in the additional sequence table 183, an additional period of 1 second is associated with the index information of "0" and the index information of "1", and the index of "k". An additional period of 4 seconds is associated with the information, and an additional period of 0 seconds is associated with the index information of "n-1" and the index information of "n".

When the condition for extending the variation continuation period of the game times is satisfied in the period adjustment process (step S616) of the variation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14), the game acquired before the period adjustment process (step S616) is executed. By collating the index information corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the times against the additional sequence table 183, the additional period corresponding to the index information is grasped. Then, the grasped additional period is added to the fluctuation continuation period of the game times in a manner corresponding to the extension condition, so that the fluctuation continuation period of the game times this time is grasped by the main MPU 62. When the additional period is acquired by the main MPU 62, an extension command in which the additional period is set is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the additional period based on the extension command, and adds the grasped additional period to the fluctuation duration of the game times grasped based on the change command, so that the actual fluctuation duration of the game times this time To grasp. Further, when the additional period other than 0 seconds is grasped based on the content of the extension command, the content of the data table for the game time production is modified in correspondence with the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game time. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a period adjustment process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62. The period adjustment process is executed in step S616 in the change continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14).

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2801: YES), the additional sequence table 183 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2802). After that, the index information corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the game times stored in the register of the main MPU 62 before the current period adjustment process (FIG. 44) is collated with the additional sequence table 183 to be added this time. The period is grasped (step S2803). Then, the fluctuation duration of the game times corresponding to the index information is read out based on the base sequence table 182 of the main ROM 63, and the additional period grasped in step S2803 is added to the read fluctuation duration of the game times. By doing so, the fluctuation duration of the game times this time is grasped (step S2804). In this case, if the additional period is longer than 0 seconds, the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended, and if the additional period is 0 seconds, the fluctuation duration of the game times is not extended.

After that, the extension command for which the additional period determined in step S2803 is set is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2805). The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the additional period based on the extension command, and adds the grasped additional period to the fluctuation continuation period of the game times grasped based on the change command, so that the actual fluctuation continuation of the game times this time Know the period. Further, when the additional period other than 0 seconds is grasped based on the content of the extension command, the content of the data table for the game time production is modified in correspondence with the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game time. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment.

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2806: YES), the additional sequence table 183 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2807). After that, before the current period adjustment process (FIG. 44), the index information corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the game times stored in the register of the main MPU 62 is collated with the additional sequence table 183 to perform the current additional period. (Step S2808), and further double the grasped additional period (step S2809). Then, the fluctuation duration of the game times corresponding to the index information is read out based on the base sequence table 182 of the main ROM 63, and the additional period of the result calculated in step S2809 with respect to the read fluctuation duration of the game times. By adding, the fluctuation duration of the current game times is grasped (step S2810). In this case, if the additional period grasped in step S2808 is a period larger than 0 seconds, the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended by twice the additional period, and the additional period is 0 seconds. The fluctuation duration of the game times is not extended.

After that, the extension command for which the additional period calculated in step S2809 is set is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2811). The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the additional period based on the extension command, and adds the grasped additional period to the fluctuation continuation period of the game times grasped based on the change command, so that the actual fluctuation continuation of the game times this time Know the period. Further, when the additional period other than 0 seconds is grasped based on the content of the extension command, the content of the data table for the game time production is modified in correspondence with the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game time. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment.

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2812: YES), the additional sequence table 183 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2813). After that, before the current period adjustment process (FIG. 44), the index information corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the game times stored in the register of the main MPU 62 is collated with the additional sequence table 183 to perform the current additional period. (Step S2814), and further triple the grasped additional period (step S2815). Then, the fluctuation duration of the game times corresponding to the index information is read out based on the base sequence table 182 of the main ROM 63, and the additional period of the result calculated in step S2815 with respect to the read fluctuation duration of the game times. By adding, the fluctuation duration of the current game times is grasped (step S2816). In this case, if the additional period grasped in step S2814 is a period larger than 0 seconds, the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended by three times the additional period, and the additional period is 0 seconds. The fluctuation duration of the game times is not extended.

After that, the extension command for which the additional period calculated in step S2815 is set is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S2817). The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the additional period based on the extension command, and adds the grasped additional period to the fluctuation continuation period of the game times grasped based on the change command, so that the actual fluctuation continuation of the game times this time Know the period. Further, when the additional period other than 0 seconds is grasped based on the content of the extension command, the content of the data table for the game time production is modified in correspondence with the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game time. The content of the data table for the game rotation effect is modified for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 as in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, if the condition for extending the duration of the fluctuation of the game times is satisfied based on the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the fluctuation of the game times acquired before the execution of the period adjustment process (FIG. 44). An additional period corresponding to the continuation period is acquired, and the acquired additional period is added to the variable continuation period of the game times acquired before the execution of the period adjustment process (FIG. 44). The duration of fluctuations is grasped. As a result, it is possible to extend the period for a length corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the game times to be extended, and it is possible to appropriately extend the fluctuation duration of the game times.

When increasing the degree of extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times executed in the high frequency support mode in correspondence with the increase in the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64, it was obtained from one additional sequence table 183. By multiplying the additional period by a multiplier of 2 or more according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the additional period is multiplied by a plurality of times, and the additional period obtained by multiplying the multiple times is before the execution of the period adjustment process (FIG. 44). It is configured to be added to the fluctuation duration of the acquired game times. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times by using one additional sequence table 183.

It should be noted that, as in the second embodiment, the parameter for extending the fluctuation duration of the game times as in the present embodiment has a parameter for initiating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode per unit time. The number of times the opening / closing execution mode is executed by the high-frequency winning mode is the parameter for creating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time as in the configuration of the target ball output rate or the third embodiment above. It may be applied to the configuration.

When applied to the second embodiment, in step S2801 in the period adjustment process (FIG. 44), the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is the first reference value (“134%”). It is determined whether or not the above is less than the second reference value (“200%”), and in step S2806, the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is the second reference value (“200%”). % ”) Or more and less than the third reference value (“300% ”), and in step S2812, the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is the third reference value. It is determined whether or not it is (“300%”) or more.

When applied to the third embodiment, in step S2801 in the period adjustment process (FIG. 44), the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or higher than the first reference value (“2”) and the second reference value (““ 2 ”). It is determined whether or not it is less than 4 ”), and in step S2806, whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (“4”) and less than the third reference value (“6”). In step S2812, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (“6”).

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for lengthening the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

45 (a) to 45 (d) are explanatory views for explaining the first to fourth base sequence tables 185 to 188.

The first to fourth base sequence tables 185 to 188 are all stored in advance in the main ROM 63. In each of the first to fourth base sequence tables 185 to 188, index information is set in which the minimum value is "0" and the maximum value is "n", and the game is played in correspondence with each index information. A variable duration of times is set.

The first base sequence table 185 shown in FIG. 45A is referred to when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the first reference value. In the first base array table 185, all the fluctuation durations of the game times that can be selected when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the first reference value are set, and the index information of a large value is set. The fluctuation duration of the game times for a reasonably long period is associated. In the acquisition process of the variation duration in step S512 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read according to the game content and the acquired variation type counter CS is the main MPU 62. It is stored in the register of. When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is less than the first reference value, the main MPU 62 collates the index information stored in the register with the first base sequence table 185 to check the variation duration of the game times. To grasp. Then, the fluctuation command in which the information on the fluctuation duration of the grasped game times is set is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

The second base array table 186 shown in FIG. 45B is referred to when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value. In the second base array table 186, all the fluctuation durations of the game times that can be selected when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value are set. The larger the index information, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game times is associated with it. In the acquisition process of the variation duration in step S512 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read according to the game content and the acquired variation type counter CS is the main MPU 62. It is stored in the register of. When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the main MPU 62 collates the index information stored in the register with the second base sequence table 186. By doing so, you can grasp the fluctuation duration of the game times. Then, the fluctuation command in which the information on the fluctuation duration of the grasped game times is set is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

The third base array table 187 shown in FIG. 45 (c) is referred to when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the second reference value and less than the third reference value. In the third base array table 187, all the fluctuation durations of the game times that can be selected when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the second reference value and less than the third reference value are set. The larger the index information, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game times is associated with it. In the acquisition process of the variation duration in step S512 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read according to the game content and the acquired variation type counter CS is the main MPU 62. It is stored in the register of. When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or more than the second reference value and less than the third reference value, the main MPU 62 collates the index information stored in the register with the third base sequence table 187. By doing so, you can grasp the fluctuation duration of the game times. Then, the fluctuation command in which the information on the fluctuation duration of the grasped game times is set is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

The fourth base array table 188 shown in FIG. 45 (d) is referred to when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value. In the fourth base array table 188, all the fluctuation durations of the game times that can be selected when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the third reference value are set, and the index information of a large value is set. The fluctuation duration of the game times for a reasonably long period is associated. In the acquisition process of the variation duration in step S512 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read according to the game content and the acquired variation type counter CS is the main MPU 62. It is stored in the register of. When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the main MPU 62 collates the index information stored in the register with the fourth base array table 188 to check the variation duration of the game times. To grasp. Then, the fluctuation command in which the information on the fluctuation duration of the grasped game times is set is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

The fluctuation duration of the game times set in each base sequence table 185 to 188 is the shortest in the first base sequence table 185 and the second shortest in the second base sequence table 186 when compared with the same index information. , The third base sequence table 187 is the second longest, and the fourth base sequence table 188 is the longest. As a result, the larger the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64, the longer the average period of the fluctuation duration of the selected game times.

Further, the increase in the fluctuation duration of the game times in each of the base sequence tables 185 to 188 when compared with the same index information increases as the value of the index information increases. As a result, when the longer period of the fluctuation duration of the game times in the first base sequence table 185 is changed to the second base sequence table 186, the third base sequence table 187, and the fourth base sequence table 188. It is possible to increase the increase in the fluctuation duration of the game times.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is less than the first reference value (step S2901: YES), the first base sequence table 185 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2902). When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2903: YES), the second base sequence table 186 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2904). ). When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or more than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2905: YES), the third base sequence table 187 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2906). ). When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2905: NO), the fourth base sequence table 188 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S2907).

When the process of step S2902, the process of step S2904, the process of step S2906, or the process of step S2907 is executed, a process for reading the period table according to the game content is executed (step S2908). In this process, if the current game is a big hit result or a small hit result, the hit time period table is read out. Further, when the game times this time are not the big hit result and the small hit result, the processes of steps S605 to S613 in the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration period (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment are executed. As a result, if the current game round is a big hit result or a small hit result, the hit time period table is read, and if the current game round is out of order and corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display, it is for reach time. The period table is read, and if the number of times the game is held this time is the high frequency support mode and the number of reserved information on the second special figure side is less than 2, the normal period table is read. If the number of times the game is held this time is in the high frequency support mode and the number of hold information on the second special figure side is 2 or more, the shortening period table is read, and the number of times this game is held is low. If the number of hold information on the first special figure side is less than 3 in the support mode, the normal period table is read, and this game is the low frequency support mode and the first If the number of reserved information on the special figure side is 3 or more, the shortening period table is read out.

In these period tables, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical ranges of "0 to 198" of the variable type counter CS so as not to overlap each other, and the game times are set for each of these groups. Index information is set instead of information on the fluctuation duration of. The index information is set so that the selection mode of the fluctuation duration of the game times based on each period table is the same as the selection mode of the fluctuation duration of the game times based on each period table in the first embodiment. It has been. Therefore, the fluctuation of the game times, which is either the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result. The period is longer than the average period of the duration and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the reach display does not occur. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times is longer in the game times that are either the 10R low probability jackpot result, the 5R high probability jackpot result, or the 10R high probability jackpot result than the game times of the out-of-reach display. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times, which is either the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result or the small hit result, is longer than the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the reach display does not occur. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times that is displayed as a missed reach is either the 2R high accuracy jackpot result or the small hit result. The average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times and the fluctuation continuation of the game times that the reach display does not occur. It will be longer than the average period of the period. Further, in the game times in which the reach display does not occur, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times is shorter when the shortened period table is selected than when the normal use period table is selected.

After executing the process of step S2908, the index information acquisition process is executed (step S2909). In the index information acquisition process, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Then, the index information is acquired by collating the acquired numerical information of the variation type counter CS with the period table read out in step S2908.

After that, the period acquisition process is executed (step S2910). In the period acquisition process, the index information acquired in step S2909 is collated with the base sequence table 185 to 188 read in any one of step S2902, step S2904, step S2906 and step S2907 to obtain this time. Acquire the fluctuation duration of the game times. The acquired information on the fluctuation duration of the game times is set in the special figure special electric timer counter in step S513 in the special figure change start process (FIG. 13). As a result, the measurement of the fluctuation duration of the game times is started. That is, in the present embodiment, since the fluctuation duration of the game times is acquired by using the base sequence table 185 to 188 corresponding to the value of the total round number counter 64c, the period for extending the fluctuation duration of the game times is obtained. The adjustment process (FIG. 24) is not executed.

After that, the variation command including the information on the variation duration of the game times acquired in step S2910 and the type command including the current hit / fail determination result and the distribution determination result are transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S2911). .. The sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the game times based on the information set in the received fluctuation command, and controls the execution of the effect according to the grasped fluctuation duration of the game times. That is, in the present embodiment, the variation duration extension process (step S1706) is not executed in the sound / light side MPU 82, and the data table modification process (step S1707) for the game rotation effect is not executed.

According to the above configuration, since the fluctuation duration of the game times is acquired by using the base sequence table 185 to 188 according to the value of the total round number counter 64c, the period adjustment for extending the fluctuation duration of the game times is obtained. No processing (FIG. 24) is performed. Then, since the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times is not executed, the extension processing of the fluctuation duration (step S1706) is not executed in the sound light side MPU 82, and further, the correction processing of the data table for the game times production is performed. (Step S1707) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c while reducing the processing load.

Index information is set in each period table read according to the game content corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS, and the index information is acquired based on the period table and the value of the variation type counter CS. .. Then, the fluctuation duration of the acquired game times changes even if the index information is the same, depending on which of the first to fourth base sequence tables 185 to 188 is collated with the index information. It is a composition. As a result, it is possible to acquire the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c while using a common table for each period. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c while suppressing the increase in the required storage capacity.

It should be noted that, as in the second embodiment, the parameter for changing the fluctuation duration of the game times as in the second embodiment is to give an opportunity to regulate the number of times the opening / closing execution mode is generated per unit time. The number of times the opening / closing execution mode is executed by the high-frequency winning mode is the parameter for creating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time as in the configuration of the target ball output rate or the third embodiment above. It may be applied to the configuration.

When applied to the second embodiment, in step S2901 in the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration period (FIG. 46), the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is the first reference value (“134”). % ”) Is determined, and in step S2903, the target ball ejection rate stored in the target ball ejection rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the first reference value (“134%”) and is the second reference value. It is determined whether or not it is less than (“200%”), and in step S905, the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the second reference value (“200%”). It is determined whether or not it is less than the three reference values (“300%”).

When applied to the third embodiment, whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is less than the first reference value (“2”) in step S2901 in the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 46). It is determined, and in step S2903, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or more than the first reference value (“2”) and less than the second reference value (“4”), and in step S905, the consecutive villas are determined. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (“4”) and less than the third reference value (“6”).

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for reducing the number of game rounds in the high frequency support mode is different from that of the first embodiment, depending on the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

When the hit / fail determination result this time is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S3001: YES), the hit time period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3002). The contents of the hit-time period table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

When the hit / fail determination result this time is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S3001: NO), it is determined whether or not a missed reach display occurs in the current game round (step S3003). When the out-of-reach display occurs in this game round (step S3003: YES), the reach time period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3004). The contents of the reach time table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

If the out-of-reach display does not occur in this game round (step S3003: NO), the current support is achieved by determining whether or not "1" is set in the high frequency support flag provided in the main RAM 64. It is determined whether or not the mode is the high frequency support mode (step S3005). In the high-frequency support mode (step S3005: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved information on the second special figure side stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is 3 or more (step S3005: YES). Step S3006). In the high-frequency support mode, as described above, the frequency with which the utility object 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened is relatively high per unit time, so that the hold information on the second special drawing side is acquired. It will be easier. Further, as already explained, the hold information on the second special figure side has priority over the hold information on the first special figure side as the start target of the game round. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the period table referred to for determining the fluctuation duration of the game times is changed according to the number of the reserved information on the second special figure side stored. ..

When the number of reserved information on the second special drawing side is less than two (step S3006: NO), the normal period table 191 (see FIG. 48 (a)) is read from the main ROM 63 (step). S3007). When the number of reserved information on the second special drawing side is two or more (step S3006: YES), the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is the second reference value (“30”). It is determined whether or not it is the above (step S3008). When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S3008: YES), the normal period table 191 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3007). When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is less than the second reference value (step S3008: NO), the shortening period table 192 (see FIG. 48B) is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3009).

FIG. 48A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal use period table 191. As shown in FIG. 48 (a), a plurality of groups are set in the normal period table 191 by dividing the numerical ranges of "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS so as not to overlap each other. , Information on the fluctuation duration of the game times is set for each of these groups. That is, in the normal use period table 191, a plurality of types are set so that the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the hit result is not obtained and the reach display does not occur is relatively long and short, and the fluctuation of "0 to 198" is set. Each of the type counters CS is assigned to one of these plurality of types of fluctuation durations.

FIG. 48B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the shortening period table 192. As shown in FIG. 48 (b), in the shortening period table 192, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical ranges of "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS so as not to overlap each other. , Information on the fluctuation duration of the game times is set for each of these groups. That is, in the shortening period table 192, a plurality of types are set so that the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the hit result is not obtained and the reach display does not occur is relatively long and short, and the fluctuation of "0 to 198" is set. Each of the type counters CS is assigned to one of these plurality of types of fluctuation durations.

In the shortened period table 192, a variable duration period shorter than the variable duration set in other period tables including the normal period table 191 is set. Therefore, if the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is less than the second reference value, no hit result will be obtained and further reach will be obtained in the situation where two or more hold information on the second special figure side is held and stored in the high frequency support mode. When a game round in which the display does not occur is started, the fluctuation duration of the game round may be shorter than in other situations. Further, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times according to the shortened period table 192 is shorter than the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times by the other period tables including the normal use period table 191. Therefore, if the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is less than the second reference value, no hit result will be obtained and further reach will be obtained in the situation where two or more hold information on the second special figure side is held and stored in the high frequency support mode. When a game round in which the display does not occur is started, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game round is shorter than in other situations.

In the low frequency support mode (step S3005: NO), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is 3 or more (step S3005: NO). Step S3010). In the low-frequency support mode, as described above, the frequency with which the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened is relatively low per unit time, so that the hold information on the second special drawing side is acquired. It becomes difficult, and it becomes easier to acquire the hold information on the first special figure side than the hold information on the second special figure side. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the period table referred to for determining the fluctuation duration of the game times is changed according to the number of the reserved information on the first special figure side stored. ..

When the number of reserved information on the first special drawing side is less than three (step S3010: NO), the normal period table 191 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3011), and the first special drawing side When the number of hold information stored in the hold information is 3 or more (step S3010: YES), the shortening period table 192 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3012). The contents of these normal period tables and shortened period tables have already been described.

When the hit time period table is read in step S3002, when the reach time period table is read in step S3004, when the normal time period table 191 is read in step S3007, the shortening period table is read in step S3009. When 192 is read, when the normal period table 191 is read in step S3011, or when the shortened period table 192 is read in step S3012, the period acquisition process is executed (step S3013). In the period acquisition process, the numerical information of the variable type counter CS is acquired. Then, by collating the acquired numerical information of the variation type counter CS with the period tables 191, 192 read out as described above, the variation continuation period of the current game times is acquired. The acquired information on the fluctuation duration of the game times is set in the special figure special electric timer counter in step S513 in the special figure change start process (FIG. 13). As a result, the measurement of the fluctuation duration of the game times is started. That is, in the present embodiment, since the fluctuation continuation period of the game times acquired by using the period tables 191, 192 is used as it is, the period adjustment process for extending the fluctuation continuation period of the game times (FIG. 24). Is not executed.

After that, the variation command including the information on the variation duration of the game times acquired this time and the type command including the current hit / fail determination result and the distribution determination result are transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S3014). The sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the game times based on the information set in the received fluctuation command, and controls the execution of the effect according to the grasped fluctuation duration of the game times. That is, in the present embodiment, the variation duration extension process (step S1706) is not executed in the sound / light side MPU 82, and the data table modification process (step S1707) for the game rotation effect is not executed.

According to the above configuration, even if the number of hold information on the second special figure side is held and stored in the high frequency support mode is two or more, if the value of the total round number counter 64c is the second reference value or more. In the high frequency support mode, instead of the shortened period table 192, the number of reserved information on the second special figure side is less than two, and the game is played with reference to the normal period table 191. The variable duration of is acquired. Furthermore, the valid period table 191 is a period table that is referred to when the number of reserved information on the first special figure side is less than 3 in the low frequency support mode. As a result, if the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, repeatedly occurs in the situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the game times in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode becomes the first. 2 Even if the number of reserved information on the special drawing side is 2 or more, the fluctuation duration of the game times is not shortened. Then, since the fluctuation duration of the game times is not shortened, the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the open / close execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

Further, as described above, in the high frequency support mode, the period table selected in the situation where the number of reserved information on the second special figure side is 2 or more is the existing normal period table 191 and the shortening period. Since the configuration is switched between the table and the table 192, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load and suppressing the increase in the storage capacity.

It should be noted that, as in the second embodiment, the parameter for changing the fluctuation duration of the game times as in the second embodiment is to give an opportunity to regulate the number of times the opening / closing execution mode is generated per unit time. The number of times the opening / closing execution mode is executed by the high-frequency winning mode is the parameter for creating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time as in the configuration of the target ball output rate or the third embodiment above. It may be applied to the configuration. When applied to the second embodiment, in step S3008 in the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration period (FIG. 47), the target payout rate stored in the target payout rate area 173 is the second reference value (“200”). % ") It is determined whether or not it is more than or equal to. When applied to the third embodiment, in step S3008 in the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration period (FIG. 47), the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 is equal to or higher than the second reference value (“4”) and the third reference. Whether or not it is less than the value (“6”) is determined.

Further, in step S3008, instead of determining whether or not the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or greater than the second reference value, it may be configured to determine whether or not the value is equal to or greater than the first reference value. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is equal to or higher than the reference value, or it may be configured to determine whether or not it is equal to or higher than another reference value different from the first to third reference values.

<7th Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

49 (a) to 49 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the first to third base sequence tables 195 to 197.

The first to third base sequence tables 195 to 197 are all stored in advance in the main ROM 63. In each of the first to third base sequence tables 195 to 197, index information is set in which the minimum value is "0" and the maximum value is "n", and the game is associated with each index information. A variable duration of times is set.

In the first base sequence table 195 shown in FIG. 49 (a), the high frequency support mode is generated based on the occurrence of the 5R high accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result in the low frequency support mode, and then the low frequency support mode is generated. It is referred to when the high frequency support mode is not continued without the occurrence of the game times in the non-regulated situation. In the first base sequence table 195, all the fluctuation durations of the game times that can be selected in the unregulated situation are set, and the larger the index information, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game times is associated with it. In the acquisition process of the variation duration in step S512 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read according to the game content and the acquired variation type counter CS is the main MPU 62. It is stored in the register of. In the non-regulated situation, the main MPU 62 grasps the fluctuation duration of the game times by collating the index information stored in the register with the first base sequence table 195. Then, the fluctuation command in which the information on the fluctuation duration of the grasped game times is set is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

In the second base sequence table 196 shown in FIG. 49 (b), the high frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of the 5R high accuracy jackpot result in the low frequency support mode, and then the game times in the low frequency support mode occur. It is referred to when it is the first regulation situation in which the high frequency support mode continues without any problem. In the second base sequence table 196, all the fluctuation durations of the game times that can be selected in the first regulation situation are set, and the larger the index information, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game times is associated with. .. In the acquisition process of the variation duration in step S512 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read according to the gaming state and the acquired variation type counter CS is the main MPU 62. It is stored in the register of. In the first regulation situation, the main MPU 62 grasps the fluctuation duration of the game times by collating the index information stored in the register with the second base sequence table 196. Then, the fluctuation command in which the information on the fluctuation duration of the grasped game times is set is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

In the third base sequence table 197 shown in FIG. 49 (c), the high frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of the 10R high accuracy jackpot result in the low frequency support mode, and then the game times in the low frequency support mode occur. It is referred to when the high frequency support mode continues without any problem in the second regulatory situation. In the third base array table 197, all the fluctuation durations of the game times that can be selected in the case of the second regulation situation are set, and the larger the index information, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game times is associated. Has been done. In the acquisition process of the variation duration in step S512 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read according to the gaming state and the acquired variation type counter CS is the main MPU 62. It is stored in the register of. In the second regulatory situation, the main MPU 62 grasps the fluctuation duration of the game times by collating the index information stored in the register with the third base sequence table 197. Then, the fluctuation command in which the information on the fluctuation duration of the grasped game times is set is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. The sound light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

The fluctuation duration of the game times set in each base sequence table 195 to 197 is the shortest in the first base sequence table 195 and the second shortest in the second base sequence table 196 when compared with the same index information. , Third base sequence table 197 is the longest. As a result, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the selected game times becomes longer in the order of non-regulated status → first regulated status → second regulated status.

Further, the increase in the fluctuation duration of the game times in each of the base sequence tables 195 to 197 when the same index information is compared increases as the value of the index information increases. As a result, when the longer period of the fluctuation duration of the game times in the first base sequence table 195 is changed to the second base sequence table 196 and the third base sequence table 197, the fluctuation duration of the game times is changed. It is possible to increase the amount of increase.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a special electric power termination process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the ending period in the current opening / closing execution mode has elapsed (step S3101). If a negative determination is made in step S3101, the special electric train termination process is terminated as it is.

When the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time has elapsed (step S3101: YES), the game state transition process is executed (step S3102). The processing content of the game state transition processing is the same as step S1202 of the special electric power termination processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

After that, it is determined whether or not the support mode before the start of the current open / close execution mode is the low frequency support mode and the support mode after the end of the current open / close execution mode is the high frequency support mode (step). S3103). The main RAM 64 is provided with a pre-start support flag. If the support mode immediately before the start / close execution mode is started is the low-frequency support mode, the pre-start support flag is cleared to "0" and the open / close execution mode is started. If the support mode immediately before the start is the high frequency support mode, "1" is set in the pre-start support flag. In step S3103, an affirmative determination is made when the pre-start support flag is "0" and the high-frequency support flag is "1".

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3103, it is determined whether or not the trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result (step S3104). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3104, information corresponding to the second cycle that enables firing of 90 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3105). The second cycle is about 0.67 seconds, which is the second shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfaction signal from the firing control unit 78c, the second cycle A launch instruction signal is transmitted to the launch control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation is such that the number of rotations is increased, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

After that, the second base sequence table 196 is read from the main ROM 63 to the main RAM 64 (step S3106). As a result, when the fluctuation duration of the game times is acquired, the second base sequence table 196 is referred to.

When a negative determination is made in step S3104, it is determined whether or not the trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result (step S3107). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3107, information corresponding to a third cycle that enables firing of 80 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3108). The third cycle is 0.75 seconds, which is the longest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the third cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfaction signal from the firing control unit 78c, the third cycle A launch instruction signal is transmitted to the launch control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the third cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation is such that the number of rotations is increased, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the third cycle elapses.

After that, the third base sequence table 197 is read from the main ROM 63 to the main RAM 64 (step S3109). As a result, when the fluctuation duration of the game times is acquired, the third base sequence table 197 is referred to.

When a negative determination is made in step S3103, when the process of step S3106 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S3107, or when the process of step S3109 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" ( Step S3110). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric end processing to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a process during special figure determination in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the final stop period of the current game round has elapsed (step S3201). If a negative determination is made in step S3201, the process of determining the special figure is terminated as it is.

When the final stop period of the current game round has passed (step S3201: YES), the winning / failing judgment result that triggered the current game round is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S3202: YES), execute the process for shifting to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, first, the acquisition process of the opening period is executed (step S3203). In the present embodiment, the opening period is one type, and specifically, it is set to 4 seconds.

After that, the information of the opening period acquired in step S3203 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S3204). As a result, the measurement of the opening period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time is started.

After that, the opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S3205). The sound / light side MPU 82 starts measuring the opening period by receiving the opening command, and causes the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to execute the opening effect. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the opening effect.

After that, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S3206). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process to the one corresponding to the special figure start process.

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result that triggered the game round is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S3202: NO), the high probability flag of the main RAM 64 is "0" and high frequency support is provided. By determining whether or not the flag is "1", it is a low-probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode triggered by the result of the 10R low-probability jackpot in the game times ended this time, and the frequency is high. It is determined whether or not the game is executed in the support mode (step S3207).

In the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (step S3207: YES), the value of the game count counter of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S3208). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the game count counter after the 1 subtraction is "0", the game rounds of the end reference number of times are executed in the situation of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not (step S3209). When the value of the game count counter is "0" (step S3209: YES), the high frequency support flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3210). As a result, the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are set.

After that, information corresponding to the first cycle that enables firing of 100 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3211). The first cycle is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfaction signal from the firing control unit 78c, the first cycle A launch instruction signal is transmitted to the launch control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation is such that the number of rotations is increased, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the first cycle elapses.

After that, the first base sequence table 195 is read from the main ROM 63 to the main RAM 64 (step S3212). As a result, when the fluctuation duration of the game times is acquired, the first base sequence table 195 is referred to.

When a negative determination is made in step S3207, a negative determination is made in step S3209, or the process of step S3212 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3213). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure determination processing to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

The first regulation status is reached when the high frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of the 5R high accuracy jackpot result in the low frequency support mode. In the first regulation situation, as described above, the firing cycle of the game ball is the second shortest, and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times is the second longest when determining the fluctuation duration of the game times. The second base sequence table 196 is referenced. Then, this first regulated situation is terminated when the game times can be executed in the low frequency support mode, and becomes a non-regulated situation. In the non-regulated situation, as described above, the first cycle is the shortest firing cycle of the game ball, and when determining the fluctuation duration of the game times, the first base array table has the shortest average duration of the fluctuation duration of the game times. 195 is referenced.

The second regulation status is reached when the high frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of the 10R high accuracy jackpot result in the low frequency support mode. In the second regulatory situation, as described above, the third cycle is the longest firing cycle of the game ball, and when determining the fluctuation duration of the game times, the third base array has the longest average duration of the fluctuation duration of the game times. Table 197 is referenced. Then, this second regulation situation is terminated when the game times can be executed in the low frequency support mode, and becomes a non-regulation situation. In the non-regulated situation, as described above, the first cycle is the shortest firing cycle of the game ball, and when determining the fluctuation duration of the game times, the first base array table has the shortest average duration of the fluctuation duration of the game times. 195 is referenced.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, a process for reading the period table according to the game content is executed (step S3301). In this process, if the current game is a big hit result or a small hit result, the hit time period table is read out. Further, when the game times this time are not the big hit result and the small hit result, the processes of steps S605 to S613 in the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration period (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment are executed. As a result, if the current game round is a big hit result or a small hit result, the hit time period table is read, and if the current game round is out of order and corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display, it is for reach time. The period table is read, and if the number of times the game is held this time is the high frequency support mode and the number of reserved information on the second special figure side is less than 2, the normal period table is read. If the number of times the game is held this time is in the high frequency support mode and the number of hold information on the second special figure side is 2 or more, the shortening period table is read, and the number of times this game is held is low. If the number of hold information on the first special figure side is less than 3 in the support mode, the normal period table is read, and this game is the low frequency support mode and the first If the number of reserved information on the special figure side is 3 or more, the shortening period table is read out.

In these period tables, a plurality of groups are set by dividing the numerical ranges of "0 to 198" of the variable type counter CS so as not to overlap each other, and the game times are set for each of these groups. Index information is set instead of information on the fluctuation duration of. The index information is set so that the selection mode of the fluctuation duration of the game times based on each period table is the same as the selection mode of the fluctuation duration of the game times based on each period table in the first embodiment. It has been. Therefore, the fluctuation of the game times, which is either the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result, the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result. The period is longer than the average period of the duration and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the reach display does not occur. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times is longer in the game times that are either the 10R low probability jackpot result, the 5R high probability jackpot result, or the 10R high probability jackpot result than the game times of the out-of-reach display. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times, which is either the 2R high-accuracy jackpot result or the small hit result, is longer than the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times in which the reach display does not occur. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times that is displayed as a missed reach is either the 2R high accuracy jackpot result or the small hit result. The average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times and the fluctuation continuation of the game times that the reach display does not occur. It will be longer than the average period of the period. Further, in the game times in which the reach display does not occur, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times is shorter when the shortened period table is selected than when the normal use period table is selected.

After executing the process of step S3301, the index information acquisition process is executed (step S3302). In the index information acquisition process, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Then, the index information is acquired by collating the acquired numerical information of the variation type counter CS with the period table read out in step S3301.

After that, the period acquisition process is executed (step S3303). In the period acquisition process, the index information acquired in step S3302 is collated with the base sequence tables 195 to 197 currently read in the main RAM 64 to acquire the fluctuation duration of the game times this time. To do. Specifically, in the non-regulated situation, the index information acquired in step S3302 is collated with the first base sequence table 195 read into the main RAM 64. In the first regulation situation, the index information acquired in step S3302 is collated with the second base sequence table 196 read into the main RAM 64. In the second regulation situation, the index information acquired in step S3302 is collated with the third base sequence table 197 read into the main RAM 64.

The information on the fluctuation duration of the game times acquired in step S3303 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter in step S513 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13). As a result, the measurement of the fluctuation duration of the game times is started. That is, in the present embodiment, since the fluctuation duration of the game times is acquired by using the base sequence tables 195 to 197, the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) for extending the fluctuation duration of the game times is not executed.

After that, the variation command including the information on the variation duration of the game times acquired in step S3303 and the type command including the current hit / fail determination result and the distribution determination result are transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S3304). .. The sound / light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the game times based on the information set in the received fluctuation command, and controls the execution of the effect according to the grasped fluctuation duration of the game times. That is, in the present embodiment, the variation duration extension process (step S1706) is not executed in the sound / light side MPU 82, and the data table modification process (step S1707) for the game rotation effect is not executed.

Next, how the non-regulated situation, the first regulated situation, and the second regulated situation are set will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 53 (a) shows the period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, and FIG. 53 (b) shows the period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result. (C) shows the period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result other than the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result and the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, and FIG. 53 (d) shows the period of the high-frequency support mode. (E) shows a period in which the non-regulated status is present, FIG. 53 (f) shows a period in which the first regulated status is present, and FIG. 53 (g) shows a period in which the second regulated status is present.

As shown in FIG. 53 (e), the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing of t1 in the non-regulated situation, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), triggered by the 10R low accuracy jackpot result, and the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing of t2. Is finished. At the timing of t2, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 53 (d). In this case, the low-frequency support mode is set immediately before the open / close execution mode is started, and the high-frequency support mode is set after the open / close execution mode is completed. Since neither the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result nor the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained, the unregulated situation is maintained as shown in FIG. 53 (e). Even if the open / close execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result or the open / close execution mode triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs in the high-frequency support mode, the first regulation status or the second regulation The unregulated situation is maintained without any transition to the situation. After that, when the digestion of the game times of the end reference number is completed in the high frequency support mode at the timing of t3, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 53 (d).

After that, as shown in FIG. 53 (e), the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result is started at the timing of t4 in the non-regulated situation, and the opening / closing is performed at the timing of t5. The execution mode ends. At the timing of t5, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 53 (d). In this case, the low-frequency support mode is set immediately before the open / close execution mode is started, the high-frequency support mode is set after the open / close execution mode is finished, and the jackpot result that triggered the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is Since it is a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result, the non-regulated situation is terminated and the first regulated situation is started as shown in FIGS. 53 (e) and 53 (f). As mentioned above, the first regulation status makes the launch cycle of the game ball the second shortest, and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times is the second when determining the fluctuation duration of the game times. A long second base sequence table 196 is referenced.

After that, in the situation where the high frequency support mode continues, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is started at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 53 (b), and the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing of t7. Is finished. Since the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs in the high-frequency support mode, the first regulatory status is maintained. Here, in the first regulation situation, the second base sequence table 196 is referred to when determining the fluctuation duration of the game times even if the game times results in a 10R high accuracy jackpot result.

During the period when the open / close execution mode is executed, even if the support mode immediately before that is the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is set, and when the open / close execution mode ends, the high frequency support mode is set again. .. In the first regulation situation, an open / close execution mode is generated triggered by a 10R low probability jackpot result, and in the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, the game times of the end reference number are exhausted and the low frequency support mode is executed. It ends by moving to.

Next, a case where the second regulatory situation occurs will be described.

As shown in FIG. 53 (e), the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing of t8 in the non-regulated situation, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), triggered by the result of the 10R high accuracy jackpot, and the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing of t9. Is finished. At the timing of t9, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 53 (d). In this case, the low-frequency support mode is set immediately before the open / close execution mode is started, the high-frequency support mode is set after the open / close execution mode is completed, and the jackpot result that triggered the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is Since it is a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, the non-regulated situation is terminated and the second regulated situation is started as shown in FIGS. 53 (e) and 53 (g). Due to the second regulation situation, as described above, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes the longest third cycle, and when determining the fluctuation duration of the game times, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times is the longest third. Base sequence table 197 is referenced.

After that, in the situation where the high frequency support mode continues, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high accuracy jackpot result is started at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 53 (a), and the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing of t11. Is finished. Since the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs in the high-frequency support mode, the second regulatory status is maintained. Here, in the second regulation situation, even if the game times result in a 5R high accuracy jackpot result, the third base sequence table 197 is referred to when determining the fluctuation duration of the game times.

During the period when the open / close execution mode is executed, even if the support mode immediately before that is the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is set, and when the open / close execution mode ends, the high frequency support mode is set again. .. In the second regulation situation, the open / close execution mode is generated triggered by the result of the 10R low probability jackpot, and in the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, the game times of the end reference number are exhausted and the low frequency support mode is executed. It ends by moving to.

According to the above configuration, the high frequency support mode is generated based on the occurrence of the 5R high accuracy jackpot result in the low frequency support mode, which is the first regulation status, and the first regulation status is the game times in the low frequency support mode. Continue until the situation is such that can be executed. In addition, the high-frequency support mode is generated based on the occurrence of the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, which results in the second regulation status. In the second regulation status, the game round can be executed in the low-frequency support mode. Continue until the situation arises. That is, when the type of the jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period in which the game times are executed in the high frequency support mode is the type to be regulated, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes longer and the game times fluctuate. There will be regulatory situations where the average duration will be longer. Then, the regulatory situation is continued as long as the advantageous period continues, and ends when the advantageous period ends. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time of the advantageous period according to the type of the jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period.

The high frequency support mode is generated based on the occurrence of the 5R high accuracy jackpot result in the low frequency support mode, which is the first regulation status, and the high frequency support is based on the occurrence of the 10R high accuracy jackpot result in the low frequency support mode. When the mode is generated, the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time becomes lower than that in the first regulation situation, which is the second regulation situation. As a result, the higher the advantage of the jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period, the lower the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time of the advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

In order to extend the fluctuation duration of the game times because the fluctuation duration of the game times is acquired by using the base sequence table 195-197 according to each of the non-regulation status, the first regulation status and the second regulation status. Period adjustment process (FIG. 24) is not executed. Then, since the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times is not executed, the extension processing of the fluctuation duration (step S1706) is not executed in the sound light side MPU 82, and further, the correction processing of the data table for the game times production is performed. (Step S1707) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times in the first regulation situation and the second regulation situation while reducing the processing load.

Index information is set in each period table read according to the game content corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS, and the index information is acquired based on the period table and the value of the variation type counter CS. .. Then, the fluctuation duration of the acquired game times changes even if the index information is the same, depending on which of the first to third base sequence tables 195 to 197 is collated. It is a composition. As a result, it is possible to acquire the fluctuation duration of the game times according to each of the non-regulated status, the first regulated status, and the second regulated status while using a common table for each period. Therefore, it is possible to prolong the fluctuation duration of the game times in the first regulation situation and the second regulation situation while suppressing the increase in the required storage capacity.

At least one of the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode depends on the non-regulated status, the first regulated status, and the second regulated status. It may have a different configuration. For example, in the non-regulated situation, the first final stop period (0.5 seconds) is selected as the final stop period of the game times, and in the first regulated situation, the second final stop period (3 seconds) is selected as the final stop period of the game times. Is selected, and if it is in the second regulation situation, the third final stop period (5 seconds) may be selected as the final stop period of the game round. In the non-regulated situation, the first opening period (4 seconds) is selected as the opening period of the open / close execution mode, and in the first regulated situation, the second opening period (10 seconds) is selected as the opening period of the open / close execution mode. In the case of the second regulation situation, the third opening period (16 seconds) may be selected as the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode. In the non-regulated situation, the first interval period (2 seconds) is selected as the interval period of the open / close execution mode, and in the first regulated situation, the second interval period (6 seconds) is selected as the interval period of the open / close execution mode. In the case of the second regulation situation, the third interval period (10 seconds) may be selected as the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode. In the non-regulated situation, the first ending period (6 seconds) is selected as the ending period of the open / close execution mode, and in the first regulated situation, the second ending period (12 seconds) is selected as the ending period of the open / close execution mode. In the case of the second regulation situation, the third ending period (18 seconds) may be selected as the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode.

As described above, the first regulation status or the second regulation status increases the final stop period of the game, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time of the advantageous period according to the type of the jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period.

<8th Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a process during special figure determination in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the final stop period of the current game round has elapsed (step S3401). If a negative determination is made in step S3401, the process of determining the special figure is terminated as it is.

When the final stop period of the current game round has passed (step S3401: YES), the winning / failing judgment result that triggered the current game round is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S3402: YES), execute the process for shifting to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, first, the acquisition process of the opening period is executed (step S3403). In the present embodiment, the opening period is one type, and specifically, it is set to 4 seconds.

After that, the information of the opening period acquired in step S3403 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S3404). As a result, the measurement of the opening period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time is started.

After that, the opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S3405). The sound / light side MPU 82 starts measuring the opening period by receiving the opening command, and causes the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to execute the opening effect. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the opening effect.

After that, provided that the hit result that triggered the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is either the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result (step S3406: YES), the firing cycle area of the main RAM 64 Information corresponding to the second cycle that enables the firing of 90 game balls per minute is set in 64b (step S3407). The second cycle is about 0.67 seconds, which is the longest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfaction signal from the firing control unit 78c, the second cycle A launch instruction signal is transmitted to the launch control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation is such that the number of rotations is increased, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S3406, or when the process of step S3407 is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S3408). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process to the one corresponding to the special figure start process.

On the other hand, when the winning / failing judgment result that triggered the game round is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S3402: NO), the high probability flag of the main RAM 64 is "0" and high frequency support is provided. By determining whether or not the flag is "1", it is a low-probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode triggered by the result of the 10R low-probability jackpot in the game times ended this time, and the frequency is high. It is determined whether or not the game is executed in the support mode (step S3409).

In the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (step S3409: YES), the value of the game count counter of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S3410). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the game count counter after the 1 subtraction is "0", the game rounds of the end reference number of times are executed in the situation of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not it is (step S3411). When the value of the game count counter is "0" (step S3411: YES), the high frequency support flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3412). As a result, the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are set.

After that, information corresponding to the first cycle that enables firing of 100 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3413). The first cycle is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfaction signal from the firing control unit 78c, the first cycle A launch instruction signal is transmitted to the launch control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation is such that the number of rotations is increased, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the first cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S3409, a negative determination is made in step S3411, or the process of step S3413 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3414). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure determination processing to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

With the above configuration, the second cycle is the longest firing cycle of the game ball based on the occurrence of the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode. Then, this regulation situation is terminated when the game times can be executed in the low frequency support mode. When the regulation status is lifted, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes the shortest first cycle. That is, when the type of the jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period in which the game round is executed in the high frequency support mode is the type of the regulation start target, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes long. Then, the regulatory situation is continued as long as the advantageous period continues, and ends when the advantageous period ends. As a result, in the advantageous period triggered by the jackpot result, which is the type of regulation start target, it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time of the advantageous period.

When the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result occurs in the low-frequency support mode, it is started from the start of the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the firing cycle of the game ball from the start of the open / close execution mode that triggered the setting of the regulation status, and it is possible to slow down the progress speed of the open / close execution mode.

When the high frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of the 10R low accuracy jackpot result in the low frequency support mode, the above regulation situation does not occur. As a result, the above-mentioned regulation situation occurs on condition that the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are set after the opening / closing execution mode, and the regulation regarding the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time is excessive. It is possible to prevent it from becoming a strange thing.

Even if the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode or the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed in the low frequency support mode, the above regulation status does not occur. As a result, it is possible to prevent the regulation on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from occurring even when there is substantially no profit in granting the game balls. ..

<9th embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a process during special figure determination in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the final stop period of the current game round has elapsed (step S3501). If a negative determination is made in step S3501, the process of determining the special figure is terminated as it is.

When the final stop period of the current game round has passed (step S3501: YES), the winning / failing judgment result that triggered the current game round is a big hit result or a small hit result (step S3502: YES), execute the process for shifting to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, first, the acquisition process of the opening period is executed (step S3503). In the present embodiment, the opening period is one type, and specifically, it is set to 4 seconds.

After that, the information of the opening period acquired in step S3503 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S3504). As a result, the measurement of the opening period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time is started.

After that, the opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S3505). The sound / light side MPU 82 starts measuring the opening period by receiving the opening command, and causes the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to execute the opening effect. Further, by transmitting a command corresponding to the command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is made to perform the opening effect.

After that, on condition that the opening / closing execution mode generated this time is the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result (step S3506: YES), that is, the high frequency winning mode and the most rounds. On condition that a number of open / close execution modes are generated, information corresponding to the second cycle that enables firing of 90 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3507). .. The second cycle is about 0.67 seconds, which is the longest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfaction signal from the firing control unit 78c, the second cycle A launch instruction signal is transmitted to the launch control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation is such that the number of rotations is increased, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S3506 or when the process of step S3507 is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S3508). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process to the one corresponding to the special figure start process.

On the other hand, when the winning / failing judgment result that triggered the game round is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S3502: NO), the high probability flag of the main RAM 64 is "0" and high frequency support is provided. By determining whether or not the flag is "1", it is a low-probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode triggered by the result of the 10R low-probability jackpot in the game times ended this time, and the frequency is high. It is determined whether or not the game is executed in the support mode (step S3509).

In the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (step S3509: YES), the value of the game count counter of the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S3510). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the game count counter after the 1 subtraction is "0", the game rounds of the end reference number of times are executed in the situation of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not it is (step S3511). When the value of the game count counter is "0" (step S3511: YES), the high frequency support flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3512). As a result, the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are set.

When a negative determination is made in step S3509, a negative determination is made in step S3511, or the process of step S3512 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3513). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure determination processing to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a special electric power termination process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by confirming whether or not the value of the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether or not the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time has elapsed (step S3601). If a negative determination is made in step S3601, the special train termination process is terminated as it is.

When the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode of this time has elapsed (step S3601: YES), the game state transition process is executed (step S3602). The processing content of the game state transition processing is the same as step S1202 of the special electric power termination processing (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

After that, information corresponding to the first cycle that enables firing of 100 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3603). The first cycle is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the firing cycle area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continuously receives the condition satisfaction signal from the firing control unit 78c, the first cycle A launch instruction signal is transmitted to the launch control unit 78c each time. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first cycle elapses, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 55a, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 29b reaches the game area PA. When the amount of rotation is such that the number of rotations is increased, the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the first cycle elapses.

After that, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S3604). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric end processing to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

With the above configuration, when the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result, which is the type of regulation start target, is started, the launch cycle of the game ball is the longest second cycle. Then, this regulation status is terminated when the opening / closing execution mode is terminated. When the regulation status is lifted, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes the shortest first cycle. As a result, it is possible to slow down the progress speed of the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result, which is the type of regulation start target, and as a result, an excessively large profit is given to the player in a short time. It becomes possible to suppress.

The firing cycle of the game ball becomes longer in the opening / closing execution mode of the highest number of rounds in the high frequency winning mode, and the firing cycle of the game ball becomes longer in the opening / closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode and the opening / closing execution mode of not the maximum number of rounds. It is kept short. As a result, it is possible to prevent the regulation regarding the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from becoming excessive.

The opening / closing execution mode in which the firing cycle of the game ball is set to the second cycle is not limited to the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode, and if it is the opening / closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode. The firing cycle of the game ball may be set to the second cycle regardless of the number of times the round game is executed, and the firing cycle of the game ball may be set to the second cycle regardless of the opening / closing execution mode. In some cases, the firing cycle of the game ball may be set to the second cycle only in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. By the way, the following configurations of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations of the above embodiments.

(1) In the first to sixth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment). The trigger for changing the firing cycle of the game ball according to the target ball output rate, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment), and the fluctuation duration of the game time according to the player's advantage. The configuration is such that the trigger for changing the determination mode is the same, but at least a part of the trigger may be different. For example, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value, one of the average periods of the firing cycle of the game ball and the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer, while the other is maintained, and the game is played. When the advantage of the person is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the average period of the firing cycle of the game ball and the fluctuation duration of the game times may be longer while the other may be maintained. .. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time.

Further, for example, when the advantage of the player becomes equal to or higher than the first reference value, one of the average period of the firing cycle of the game ball and the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer, while the other is maintained. , When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the average period of the firing cycle of the game ball and the fluctuation duration of the game times is longer, while one is maintained, and the player is maintained. When the advantage of is equal to or higher than the third reference value, both the firing cycle of the skill ball and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times may be lengthened. As a result, until the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the third reference value, it is possible to smoothly enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time. When the advantage of the above is equal to or higher than the third reference value, it is possible to sharply increase the function of suppressing that an excessively large profit is given to the player in a short time.

(2) In the first to sixth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment). The final stop period of the game is the first final stop period and the second final stop period, depending on whether or not the target ball output rate, or the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the second reference value. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the final stop period of the game round is the first final stop period depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value. It may be configured to be switched between the second final stop period, and the final stop period of the game times is the first final stop period and the second final stop depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value. The configuration may be switched between the period and the period.

In addition, in a configuration in which another reference value other than the first reference value, the second reference value, and the third reference value is set, the final stop of the game round depends on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the other reference value. The period may be switched between the first final suspension period and the second final suspension period. In this case, the final stop period of the game times is changed at a different moment from the time when the firing cycle of the game balls and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times are changed.

(3) In the first to sixth embodiments, the final stop period of the game times may be the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, or the second embodiment. For example, the target ball output rate in the target ball output rate area 173, and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) can be switched between the first final stop period and the second final stop period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the switching can be performed in three stages or four or more stages. In the case of a configuration that can be switched in three stages, if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the shortest final stop period is selected, and if the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value, the second reference value is selected. If it is less than, the second shortest final stop period is selected, and if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the longest final stop period is selected. As a result, the number of stages in which the final stop period of the game round is changed according to the player's advantage increases, and the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time is gradually provided. It becomes possible to increase.

(4) In the first to sixth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment). Depending on whether or not the target ball output rate, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode is the first opening period and the second opening period. The configuration is such that it can be switched between, but it is not limited to this, and the opening period is between the first opening period and the second opening period depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value. The opening period may be switched between the first opening period and the second opening period depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value.

Further, in a configuration in which another reference value other than the first reference value, the second reference value and the third reference value is set, the opening period is the first depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the other reference value. The configuration may be such that the opening period and the second opening period can be switched. In this case, the opening period will be changed at a different timing from the trigger for changing the firing cycle of the game ball and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times.

(5) In the first to sixth embodiments, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode may be the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, or in the second embodiment. For example, the target ball output rate in the target ball output rate area 173, or the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is configured to be switched between the first opening period and the second opening period. The configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be switched in three steps or four or more steps. In the case of a configuration that can be switched in three stages, if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the shortest opening period is selected, and the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value. If so, the second shortest opening period is selected, and if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the longest opening period is selected. As a result, the number of stages in which the opening period is changed according to the player's advantage increases, and it is possible to gradually increase the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time. It becomes.

(6) In the first to sixth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment). The interval period of the open / close execution mode is the first interval period and the second interval period depending on whether or not the target ball output rate, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the second reference value. Although it is configured to be switched between, the interval period is not limited to this, and the interval period is between the first interval period and the second interval period depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value. The interval period may be switched between the first interval period and the second interval period depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value.

Further, in a configuration in which another reference value other than the first reference value, the second reference value and the third reference value is set, the interval period is the first depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the other reference value. The configuration may be such that the interval period and the second interval period can be switched. In this case, the interval period is changed at a different timing from the trigger for changing the firing cycle of the game ball and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times.

(7) In the first to sixth embodiments, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode may be the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, or in the second embodiment. For example, the target ball ejection rate in the target ball ejection rate area 173, or the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is configured to be switched between the first interval period and the second interval period. The configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be switched in three steps or four or more steps. In the case of a configuration that can be switched in three stages, if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the shortest interval period is selected, and the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value. If so, the second shortest interval period is selected, and if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the longest interval period is selected. As a result, the number of stages in which the interval period is changed according to the player's advantage increases, and it is possible to gradually increase the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time. It becomes.

(8) In the first to sixth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment). When the interval period of the open / close execution mode is changed according to the target ball output rate in the above (the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment), the interval period included in one open / close execution mode Although all the configurations are changed, only a part of the interval period included in one open / close execution mode may be changed, and the rest may not be changed.

(9) In the first to sixth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment). The ending period of the open / close execution mode is the first ending period and the second ending period depending on whether or not the target ball output rate, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the second reference value. The configuration is such that it can be switched between, but it is not limited to this, and the ending period is between the first ending period and the second ending period depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value. The ending period may be switched between the first ending period and the second ending period depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value.

Further, in a configuration in which another reference value other than the first reference value, the second reference value and the third reference value is set, the ending period is the first depending on whether or not the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the other reference value. The configuration may be such that the ending period and the second ending period can be switched. In this case, the ending period is changed at a different timing from the trigger for changing the firing cycle of the game ball and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times.

(10) In the first to sixth embodiments, the ending period of the open / close execution mode may be the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, or in the second embodiment. For example, the target ball output rate in the target ball output rate area 173, or the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is configured to be switched between the first ending period and the second ending period. The configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be switched in three steps or four or more steps. In the case of a configuration that can be switched in three stages, if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the shortest ending period is selected, and the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value. If so, the second shortest ending period is selected, and if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the longest ending period is selected. As a result, the number of stages in which the ending period is changed according to the player's advantage increases, and it is possible to gradually increase the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time. It becomes.

(11) In the first to sixth embodiments, the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode are all the advantages of the player (in the first embodiment, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, In the second embodiment, the target ball output rate in the target ball output rate area 173, and in the third embodiment, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181) is changed, but the configuration is limited to this. There is no such thing, and part of the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the open / close execution mode is changed according to the player's advantage, while the rest is not changed according to the player's advantage. May be good.

(12) In the first to sixth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment). Depending on the target ball output rate, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment), the trigger for changing the final stop period of the game round, the trigger for changing the opening period of the open / close execution mode, the open / close execution The trigger for changing the interval period of the mode and the trigger for changing the ending period of the open / close execution mode are all the same, but at least a part of these triggers may be different. For example, if the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value, the final stop period of the game is changed to be longer, and if the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the second reference value. Both the opening period and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode are changed to be longer, and when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode is changed to be longer. It may be configured. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time.

Further, for example, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value, the final stop period of the game is changed to be longer, and when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second reference value. Is changed so that both the opening period and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode become longer, and when the player's advantage exceeds the third reference value, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode becomes longer. If the player's advantage exceeds the 4th reference value, the final stop period of the game round, and the opening period, ending period, and interval period of the open / close execution mode are all changed to be longer. It may be configured. As a result, until the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the fourth reference value, it is possible to smoothly enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time. When the advantage of the above is equal to or higher than the fourth reference value, it is possible to sharply increase the function of suppressing that an excessively large profit is given to the player in a short time.

(13) In the first to fourth embodiments, the longest period may be the same as the fluctuation duration of the longest game number set in the first per hour period table. In this case, either the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result is the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the value of the total round number counter 64c in the second embodiment). Target ball output rate When the target ball output rate in the area 173, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the game times that can be selected in other situations as well. The longest fluctuation duration will be selected.

Further, it is either the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, and the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target in the second embodiment). When the target ball output rate in the ball output rate area 173, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the third reference value, it is set in the first per hour period table. A configuration may be configured in which the fluctuation duration of the game to be executed is selected by lottery from a group of a plurality of types of fluctuation duration of the game that is longer than the fluctuation duration of the predetermined game. Even in this case, if either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result and the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value, it is set in the first hit time period table. A period longer than the fluctuation continuation period of the predetermined game times is selected as the fluctuation continuation period of the game times. It should be noted that the longest fluctuation duration of the game may or may not be included in the group of the fluctuation duration of the plurality of types of game times.

(14) In the first to fourth embodiments, the player's advantage is either the 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or the 10R high-accuracy jackpot result (in the first embodiment, the total number of rounds counter 64c). The value, the target ball output rate in the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the third reference value. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the longest period is selected as the fluctuation duration, and the player's advantage is the third criterion, which is one of the jackpot results that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode. If it is equal to or more than the value, the longest period may be selected as the fluctuation duration of the game times, and if the player's advantage is equal to or more than the third reference value, the game times may be any jackpot result. The longest period may be selected as the fluctuation duration of. Further, the advantage of the player who triggers the selection of the longest period as the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is not limited to the configuration in which the third reference value or more is set, and may be the second reference value or higher. , It may be equal to or more than the first reference value, and may be equal to or more than another reference value.

(15) In the first to fourth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment). The longest period in a game that is either a 10R low accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high accuracy jackpot result in a situation where the target ball output rate, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the third reference value. The configuration is not limited to displaying the dedicated movie image G2, and the longest period is selected only in the game times that result in a 10R high accuracy jackpot in a situation where the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value. In addition, the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period may be displayed. In this case, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs, and then the high-probability mode is set. Since the fluctuation duration of is the longest period, it will take a long time before the most favorable situation occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time. In addition, by displaying the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period, it is possible to make the player recognize that the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds, which is the high frequency winning mode, is generated and then the high probability mode is set. It becomes.

(16) In the first to fourth embodiments, a quasi-longest period is set separately from the longest period, and the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the first In the case of the second embodiment, the target ball output rate in the target ball output rate area 173, and in the third embodiment, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181) is equal to or higher than the third reference value, and the result is a 10R low probability jackpot. In the situation where the quasi-longest period is selected as the fluctuation duration of the game times and the movie image dedicated to the quasi-longest period is displayed and the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value. When a game time that results in a 10R high-accuracy jackpot occurs, the longest period may be selected as the fluctuation duration of the game time, and the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period may be displayed. In this case, the quasi-longest period is 9 minutes and 30 seconds, which is longer than the variable duration of the game times selected in other situations except for the longest period, so that the maximum number of rounds in which the high-frequency winning mode is set. It is possible to take a long time until the opening / closing execution mode is generated, and different effects are executed depending on whether the 10R low accuracy jackpot result is generated or the 10R high accuracy jackpot result is generated. It becomes possible to do so.

(17) In the first to fourth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment). The target ball output rate, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment) is not limited to a configuration in which the fluctuation duration of the game times is lengthened, and the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times is not limited. May be configured to be long. For example, various period tables for determining the fluctuation duration of the game times by lottery may be changed according to the player's advantage. In this case, a first table group of various period tables and a second table group of various period tables are provided, and the average of the fluctuation duration of the game times when the second table group is referred to rather than the first table group. Try to make the period longer. Then, when the advantage of the player becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined reference value, the table group referred to when determining the fluctuation duration of the game times is changed from the first table group to the second table group. As a result, when the player's advantage exceeds the predetermined reference value, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times becomes longer.

Further, as the above table group, a third table group is provided in which the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times when referred to is longer than that of the second table group, and the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the first reference value. In that case, the table group referred to when determining the fluctuation duration of the game times is changed from the first table group to the second table group, and when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the game is played. The table group referred to when determining the duration of fluctuation of the times may be changed from the second table group to the third table group. As a result, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times can be gradually lengthened according to the player's advantage.

(18) In the first to seventh embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment). Depending on the target ball output rate, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment, the advantageous period in the seventh embodiment), the fluctuation duration of the game times or the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times If becomes longer, the probability of occurrence of the game times in which the reach is displayed may be increased accordingly. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the increase in the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times or the fluctuation duration of the game times.

(19) In the first to seventh embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, and the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment). The firing cycle of the game ball is changed to a longer cycle than the first cycle according to the target ball ejection rate, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment, and the advantageous period in the seventh embodiment). If so, the changed long firing cycle is applied only in the opening / closing execution mode of the advantageous period, and the firing cycle of the game ball is changed to the first cycle in the period other than the opening / closing execution mode in the advantageous period. May be good. On the contrary, the changed long firing cycle may be applied only in the advantageous period other than the opening / closing execution mode, and may not be applied in the opening / closing execution mode in the advantageous period.

(20) In the first to fourth embodiments, the timing at which the display of the remaining time image G3 is started is arbitrary as long as it is after the timing at which the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is started. For example, the display of the remaining time image G3 may be started after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is started.

(21) As a configuration for changing the gaming situation according to the player's advantage, the following configuration may be applied in addition to or in place of the configuration of each of the above embodiments.

(21-1) The player's advantage as in the first to sixth embodiments (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball output rate area in the second embodiment). In a configuration in which at least the firing cycle of the game ball in the open / close execution mode is changed according to the target ball output rate in 173 and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment), the open / close execution is performed in the high frequency winning mode. The configuration is such that one round game in the mode ends when either the condition that the open duration of T seconds elapses or the Q game balls enter the special electric winning device 32 is satisfied. The firing cycle of the game ball is t1 seconds if the player's advantage is less than the predetermined reference value, and t2 seconds (t2> t1) if the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the predetermined reference value. If you do
t1 × Q <T ≦ t2 × Q
It may be configured as As a result, before the firing cycle of the game ball is changed to a long cycle according to the player's advantage, Q or more special electric powers, which is the upper limit number in each round game in the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode, While it is possible to enter the game ball into the winning device 32, if the firing cycle of the game ball is changed to a longer cycle according to the player's advantage, opening and closing by the high frequency winning mode In each round game in the execution mode, it becomes impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the special electric winning device 32, which is the maximum number of Q or more. By changing the firing cycle of the game ball according to the player's advantage in this way, it is possible to change the expected number of game balls to be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode. It becomes.

In addition, one of the conditions that one round game in the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode has passed the opening duration of T seconds and that Q game balls enter the special electric winning device 32 are satisfied. The firing cycle of the game ball is t1 second if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, and the second is that the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value. If it is less than the reference value, it will be t2 seconds (t2> t1), and if the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the second reference value, it will be t3 seconds (t3> t2).
t1 × Q <t2 × Q ≦ T <t3 × Q,
Or t1 × Q <t2 × Q <T ≦ t3 × Q,
Or t1 × Q <t2 × Q <T <t3 × Q,
It may be configured as. With this configuration, up to the stage where the firing cycle of the game ball is extended by one step according to the player's advantage, the maximum number of Q or more in each round game in the open / close execution mode by the high frequency winning mode While it is possible to enter the game ball into the special electric winning device 32, the firing cycle of the game ball is extended by two steps according to the advantage of the player, so that the high frequency winning mode is used. In each round game in the open / close execution mode, it becomes impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the special electric winning device 32, which is the maximum number of Q or more. By changing the firing cycle of the game ball stepwise according to the player's advantage in this way, the expected number of game balls to be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode is stepwise. It is possible to change to.

(21-2) In a configuration in which one round game in the open / close execution mode ends when the upper limit number of game balls enters the special electric winning device 32, the upper limit number is the player's advantage (first implementation). In the case of the embodiment, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, in the case of the second embodiment, the target ball ejection rate in the target ball ejection rate area 173, and in the third embodiment, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181). It may be a variable configuration. For example, if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the upper limit is 10, and if the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the upper limit is 10. If the number is 8 and the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second reference value and less than the third reference value, the upper limit may be five. By varying the above upper limit number of the special electric winning device 32 in the round game according to the player's advantage in this way, the expected entry of the game ball into the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode in the high frequency winning mode. It is possible to change the number.

(21-3) Two gates through which a game ball can pass are provided in the game area PA, and the game ball passes through one of the two gates after the game round resulting in a big hit is completed. Then, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode of the five round games, and when the game ball passes through the other gate, either the opening / closing execution mode of the two round games or the opening / closing execution mode of the ten round games is executed. It may be configured that the opening / closing execution mode is determined by lottery. In this case, the two gates are arranged side by side, and the game ball that has reached the area where the two gates are provided is guided to one of the gates with a predetermined probability by a distribution member or the like, and the other It is configured to be guided to the gate of the above with a specific probability. When the opening / closing execution mode of 10 round games occurs in the configuration, the firing cycle of the game ball, the fluctuation duration of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, and the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening / closing execution mode. When at least one period of the above is longer than before and other open / close execution modes occur, the configuration may be such that the extension does not occur. In addition, when the opening / closing execution mode of 5 round games or the opening / closing execution mode of 10 round games occurs, the firing cycle of the game ball, the fluctuation duration of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, and the opening / closing execution mode If at least one of the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period of the above is longer than before, and other opening / closing execution modes occur, the extension may not occur.

(21-4) Advantage of the player (value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, target ball ejection rate in the target ball ejection rate area 173 in the second embodiment, third When the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the embodiment and the advantageous period in the seventh embodiment) exceeds the predetermined reference value, the progress of the game is stopped, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 62 is stopped, and so on. In the open / close execution mode, the number of game balls paid out for the entry of the game ball into a predetermined entry portion (for example, the general winning opening 31) is reduced, the progress of the game is stopped after the end of the open / close execution mode, and the opening / closing is performed. Transition to the normal gaming state after the end of the execution mode, transition to the setting value with the lowest advantage when there are multiple levels of setting values that determine the player's advantage, and start of the open / close execution mode. It may be configured such that the standby of the main side RAM 64 and the initialization of the main side RAM 64 occur. For example, when the total number of game balls paid out to the player reaches 12,000 during the advantageous period, the progress of the game may be forcibly stopped at that time.

(21-5) Advantage of the player (value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, target ball ejection rate in the target ball ejection rate area 173 in the second embodiment, third If the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the embodiment and the advantageous period in the seventh embodiment) exceeds the predetermined reference value, the jackpot result may not be selected in the hit / fail determination process. In this case, during the period when the jackpot result is not selected in the hit / fail determination process, the high-frequency support mode is set and the frequency of entering the second operating port 34 increases, so that the number of game balls owned by the player does not need to be reduced so much. It may be possible to generate a small hit result with a high probability based on the entry of the game ball into the second operating port 34, and one or two game balls in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result. The number of game balls owned by the player may be slightly increased by configuring the player to enter the special electric winning device 32.

(21-6) The interval period in the open / close execution mode may be set to a relatively long period such as 5 seconds. In this case, by setting the support mode to the high frequency support mode instead of the low frequency support mode in the interval period, the second operation is performed in the interval period even if the interval period is set to a relatively long period. It is possible that the game balls enter the mouth 34 frequently, and the number of game balls owned by the player does not need to be reduced so much.

(21-7) As the high-probability mode of the winning / losing lottery mode, the first high-probability mode and the second high-probability mode are set so that the winning probability of the jackpot result is relatively high and low, and opens and closes during the advantageous period. The configuration may be such that the first high-probability mode and the second high-probability mode are alternately switched each time the execution mode is generated. Further, in the winning / failing lottery mode, there is one type of high-probability mode, and as a gaming state that is a low-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, a continuous state in which the game state continues until the next opening / closing execution mode occurs is set. In the above configuration, the high probability mode and the continuous state may be alternately switched each time the opening / closing execution mode occurs in the advantageous period.

(21-8) The configuration is such that whether or not the reserved information on the special figure side stored in the special figure holding area 122 corresponds to the jackpot result before the start target of the game round is specified in advance. If it is specified in the prior identification that the hold information on the special figure side corresponds to the jackpot result, the hold information on the special figure side, which is the previous digestion order for the hold information on the special figure side, is held. The configuration may be such that the fluctuation duration of the game times triggered by the information is the longest period. In addition, when it is specified in the above-mentioned destination identification that the reserved information on the predetermined second special drawing side corresponds to the jackpot result, the reserved information on the second special drawing side corresponds to the predetermined second special drawing side. The change duration of the game times triggered by the hold information on the special figure side, which is the previous digestion order for the hold information of, and the hold information on the first special figure side that is held and stored at that time. The variable duration of the game times may be the longest period.

In addition, when the holding information on the special figure side corresponding to the 10R high-probability jackpot result, which is the most advantageous jackpot result, is stored on hold for a longer period of fluctuation of the game times based on the above-mentioned prior identification. The hold information on the special figure side corresponding to the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result, which triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high-frequency winning mode, is reserved and stored. It may be configured to occur in the case of the above, and the special figure side hold corresponding to the 5R high-probability jackpot result, the 10R low-probability jackpot result, or the 10R high-probability jackpot result, which triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode. It may be configured to occur when information is stored on hold, and a special figure corresponding to a 5R high-accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result, which is a high-frequency support mode and a high-probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. It may be configured to occur when the hold information on the side is held and stored.

(21-9) The number of times of opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 in one round game in the opening / closing execution mode may be changed according to the player's advantage. For example, until the total number of game balls acquired by the player during the advantageous period reaches 2000, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in one round game is one, and when the total number is 2000 or more. May open and close the special electric winning device 32 twice in one round game, and when the number of opening and closing is 3000 or more, the special electric winning device 32 may be opened and closed three times in one round game. ..

(21-10) As the number of times the jackpot result occurs in the advantageous period increases, the frequency with which the second operating port 34 is opened per unit time in the high frequency support mode may gradually decrease. For example, as the number of times the jackpot result occurs in the advantageous period, the period in which the variable display of the pattern is displayed on the general map display unit 38a may become longer. Further, for example, as the number of occurrences of the jackpot result increases in the advantageous period, the period in which the second operating port 34 is opened in the high frequency support mode may be shortened.

(22) The type of advantage of the player that triggers the change of the game situation is not limited to that of each of the above embodiments, and the following may be applied.

(22-1) A predetermined advantageous period, which is one of a high-probability mode, a gaming state, a high-frequency support mode, and a high-probability mode, which is a high-frequency support mode, is started. The game situation may be changed according to the number of game times digested from the game to the occurrence of a predetermined jackpot result. For example, if a predetermined jackpot result occurs within 30 games after the above-mentioned predetermined advantageous period is started, the firing cycle of the game ball, the fluctuation duration of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, and the opening / closing execution mode The target period, which is at least one of the opening period, the interval period, and the ending period of the above, may be longer than before. As a result, if a predetermined jackpot result occurs early after the predetermined advantageous period is started, the target period can be lengthened.

Further, if a predetermined jackpot result occurs within 50 games after the predetermined advantageous period is started, the target period becomes the first target period longer than that, and the predetermined advantageous period is started. If a predetermined jackpot result occurs within 25 games, the target period may be a second target period longer than the first target period. As a result, the smaller the number of game times digested from the start of the predetermined advantageous period to the occurrence of the predetermined jackpot result, the longer the target period can be.

The predetermined jackpot result may be all jackpot results, or may be a jackpot result that triggers an opening / closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode, and is opened / closed by the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode. It may be a jackpot result that triggers the execution mode, or the winning / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode may be a jackpot result that is a high probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is frequently used. It may be a jackpot result that is a support mode, or may be a jackpot result in which the winning / losing lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode.

(22-2) Regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode, the period in which the high-frequency support mode is the advantageous period is not limited to the configuration in which the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are the advantageous period. It may be configured. In this case, in the first embodiment, the number of round games generated in the advantageous period is measured using the total number of rounds counter 64c, and in the third embodiment, the frequency of round games generated in the advantageous period is high. The number of times of opening / closing execution mode in which the winning mode is set is measured by using the consecutive villa counter 181.

(22-3) The opening period and ending period of the opening / closing execution mode may be changed according to the total number of game balls to be paid out. For example, when the total number of game balls paid out reaches 5,000, the opening period and the ending period will be extended in the first stage, and when the total number of game balls paid out reaches 10,000, the opening period will be extended. In addition, the ending period may be extended in the second stage. In this case, the opening period and the ending period are longer in the case where the second stage is extended than in the case where the first stage is extended. In addition, the extension of the first stage is performed by adding an additional period to each of the initial period of the opening period and the initial period of the ending period, and the extension of the second stage is the initial period of the opening period. The configuration may be performed by adding twice the additional period to each of the initial period of the ending period.

(22-4) The opening period and ending period of the opening / closing execution mode may change according to the total number of game balls acquired (total number of game balls paid out-total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA). Good. For example, when the total number of game balls acquired reaches 2000, the opening period and the ending period are extended in the first stage, and when the total number of game balls acquired reaches 3000, the opening period is extended. In addition, the ending period may be extended in the second stage. In this case, the opening period and the ending period are longer in the case where the second stage is extended than in the case where the first stage is extended. In addition, the extension of the first stage is performed by adding an additional period to each of the initial period of the opening period and the initial period of the ending period, and the extension of the second stage is the initial period of the opening period. The configuration may be performed by adding twice the additional period to each of the initial period of the ending period.

(23) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the changed state of various periods is canceled when the high frequency support mode ends, and the configuration in which the changed state of various periods is canceled under the following conditions is also possible. Good.

(23-1) When the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the various periods are changed becomes the end reference number, the changed state of the various periods may be released.

(23-2) In the second embodiment, when the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 reaches the end reference value, the state in which various periods are changed is released. May be good. In this case, by setting the end reference value to a value smaller than the first reference value, it is possible to prevent the change and cancellation of various periods from being repeated in a short time.

(23-3) A configuration in which the changed state of various periods is released when the number of game times executed without the predetermined opening / closing execution mode occurring after the various periods are changed reaches the end reference number. May be. In this case, the predetermined opening / closing execution mode may be all the opening / closing execution modes, the opening / closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode, or the high frequency winning mode and the opening / closing execution mode by the maximum number of rounds.

(23-4) When the end reference period elapses after the various periods are changed, the changed state of the various periods may be released.

(23-5) The state in which the various periods have been changed may be released when the game times can be executed in the low probability mode.

(24) When the player's advantage is reduced in addition to or in place of the configuration for changing the game situation so that the player's advantage can be reduced when the player's advantage is increased. It may be configured to change to a gaming situation that makes it possible to increase the advantage of the player. For example, when the player's advantage falls below a predetermined reference value, the firing cycle of the game ball, the average period of the fluctuation duration of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, and the interval. At least one of the period and the ending period may be shorter than before.

(25) Advantage of the player (value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first embodiment, target ball output rate in the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment, third embodiment If so, the value of the consecutive villa counter 181, the advantageous period in the case of the seventh embodiment), the final stop period of the game times, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending of the opening / closing execution mode. At least one of the periods may be changed, but the duration of the change in the game times may not be changed according to the above-mentioned advantage of the player.

(26) The hold information acquired due to the winning of the first operating port 33 and the holding information acquired due to the winning of the second operating port 34 may be distinguished and not stored. .. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the reserved information on the second operating port 34 side is preferentially digested, and conversely, the reserved information on the first operating port 33 side is preferentially digested. It may be applied, or a configuration that is digested in the order of acquisition may be applied regardless of whether it is the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

(27) The hold information acquired due to the winning of the first operating port 33 is subject to the hit / fail judgment, and the holding information acquired due to the winning of the second operating port 34. May be configured in which the distribution mode of the jackpot result is the same as in the case where is the target of the hit / fail judgment.

(28) Display control based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 90 is controlled by the voice emission control device 80 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The device 90 may be configured to control the voice emission control device 80. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 80 and the display control device 90 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 60, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 60. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 80 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 80 to the display control device 90 are also arbitrary.

(29) The device on which the game rotation operation is executed is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be configured such that the game rotation operation is executed by operating a movable decorative member. Often, the game rotation operation may be executed by lighting a predetermined light emitting unit, or the game rotation operation may be executed by a combination of all or a part of each of the above aspects.

(30) In the above embodiment, the special figure display units 37a and 37b are configured to display the stop result corresponding to each game result, but instead of this, the special figure display units 37a and 37b may not be provided. Often, a common stop result may be displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b regardless of the game result, and the stop result is randomly displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b. As a result, it may not be possible to identify which game result is from the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b. Further, in each of the above embodiments, in the special figure display units 37a and 37b, the display of a predetermined pattern is repeated regardless of the result of the hit / miss determination and the distribution determination, so that the reach display and the reach effect are not executed, and the final result is achieved. Although the result of the hit / fail judgment and the distribution judgment is notified based on the stop result, the special figure display units 37a and 37b may also be configured to perform the reach display and the reach effect, and the game times in which the reach effect occurs. Then, the stop result different from the game times in which the reach effect does not occur may be displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b.

(31) The present invention can be applied to other types of pachinko machines and the like different from the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, and a game ball is dropped from the upper part of the game area instead of being supplied to the game area by launching the game ball. A pachinko machine that supplies game balls to the game area by letting them play, a pachinko machine that becomes a big hit when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine , The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as sparrow balls.

Further, the present invention is also applied to a ball circulation type pachinko machine to be supplied to the game area again by circulating the game balls discharged from the game area in the pachinko machine without being discharged from the pachinko machine. it can. In the ball circulation type pachinko machine, it is prohibited for the player to touch the game ball circulated in the pachinko machine, and it is used based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry section. When the number of possible game balls is given to the player and one game ball is launched into the game area, the number of game balls that can be used by the game ball is reduced by one.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines. Further, the present invention can be applied to a medalless slot machine in which information on the number of virtual medals that can be used by a player is used as a game value, instead of using medals as a game value.

In addition, the gaming machine body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Profit is given to the player (ball entry section 31) based on the occurrence of a profit-giving event (the entry of the game ball into any of the entry sections 31 to 34, the game times corresponding to the jackpot result) due to the game being performed. If the entry of the game ball into any of ~ 34 is a profit-giving event, the game ball is given, and if the game times corresponding to the jackpot result is a profit-giving event, the opening / closing execution mode is generated). If the entry of the game ball into any of the ball units 31 to 34 is a profit-giving event, the function of executing the processes of steps S209 and S217 in the main MPU 62, the payout control device 77, and the game times corresponding to the jackpot result. If is a profit-giving event, the function of executing the processes of steps S409 to S412 in the main MPU 62) and
Player advantage (value of total round number counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth embodiments, target ball output rate in the second embodiment, value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment, Situation determining means (first) for determining the subsequent game situation according to the presence / absence of an advantageous period in the seventh embodiment, the presence / absence of an advantageous period in the eighth embodiment, and the presence / absence of the opening / closing execution mode in the ninth embodiment). In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S602 to S604 in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the cycle setting processing in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the period adjustment processing in the main MPU 62, and the final stop in the main MPU 62. A function to execute a period selection process, a function to execute an opening period selection process in the main MPU 62, a function to execute an interval period selection process in the main MPU 62, and a function to execute an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62. In the second embodiment, the function of executing the cycle setting process in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the processes of steps S2201 to S2204 in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the period adjustment process in the main MPU 62, and the third In the embodiment, the function of executing the cycle setting process in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the process of steps S2601 to S2604 in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the period adjustment process in the main MPU 62, and the main in the fourth embodiment. A function of executing the period adjustment process in the side MPU 62, a function of executing the process of steps S291 to S2907 in the main MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment, and a process of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment. The function of executing the processes of steps S3103 to S3109 and steps S3207 to S3212 in the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment, and the steps S3406, S3407 and step S3406 in the main MPU 62 in the eighth embodiment. A function of executing the process of S3413, a function of executing the process of step S3506, step S3507, and step S3603 in the main MPU 62 in the ninth embodiment), and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A1, the profit is given to the player based on the occurrence of the profit-giving event due to the game being performed, so that the player plays the game while expecting the profit-giving event to occur. Become. In this case, since the subsequent game situation is determined according to the player's advantage, it is possible to appropriately grant the profit to the player.

Feature A2. Target period (in the first to third embodiments, the firing cycle, the fluctuation duration of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode, In the fourth embodiment, the fluctuation duration of the game times, in the fifth to sixth embodiments, the average of the fluctuation durations of the game times, in the seventh embodiment, the firing cycle and the average of the fluctuation durations of the game times, the first In the eighth to ninth embodiments, the firing cycle) fluctuates, so that the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event can fluctuate.
The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the situation determining means varies the target period according to the player's advantage.

According to the feature A2, in the configuration in which the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event can be changed due to the change of the target period, the subsequent target period is changed according to the advantage of the player. To. Then, as the target period fluctuates, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event fluctuates, and as a result, the period required from the predetermined timing until the profit is granted fluctuates. Become. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature A3. In the situation determining means, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage (first reference value, second reference value or third reference value), or the player's advantage is the predetermined advantage (first reference). The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein when the value is equal to or higher than the value, the second reference value, or the third reference value), the target period is set to be longer than before.

According to the feature A3, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the target period becomes longer than before, and the target period is up to that point. The longer the period, the longer the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event, and the longer the period, the longer the period required from the predetermined timing until the profit is granted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature A4. As the predetermined advantage, at least a first predetermined advantage (first reference value) and a second predetermined advantage (second reference value) in which the player's advantage is higher than the first predetermined advantage are set. Has been
The situation determining means
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage, the means for making the target period longer than before ( In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1504, step S1603 and step S1604 in the main MPU 62, and in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2104, step S2303 and step S2304 in the main MPU 62. In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processes of step S2504, step S2703 and step S2704 in the main MPU 62) and
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage, the means for making the target period longer than before ( In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1506, step S1606 and step S1607 in the main MPU 62, and in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2106, step S2306 and step S2307 in the main MPU 62. In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processes of step S2506, step S2706 and step S2707 in the main MPU 62) and
The gaming machine according to the feature A3, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature A4, the target period is gradually lengthened according to the player's advantage. Therefore, as the player's advantage becomes higher, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event becomes longer in a stepwise manner, and the profit is given from the predetermined timing by gradually lengthening the period. The time required for this is gradually increased. As a result, it is possible to gradually enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time.

Feature A5. A supply means (game ball launch mechanism 27) for supplying a game ball to the game area (game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when the supply operation is performed by the player in a situation where the game ball can be supplied is provided.
The profit-giving event occurs based on the game ball entering the ball entry means (general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) provided in the game area. It is a configuration to
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A4, wherein the target period is the predetermined cycle.

According to the feature A5, the predetermined period in which the game ball is supplied to the game area is changed according to the advantage of the player. Then, as the predetermined cycle fluctuates, the period required from one game ball entering the ball entry means to the next game ball enters fluctuates, and the profit is obtained by fluctuating the period. The period required for granting will vary. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature A6. The game rounding operation is started based on the start trigger, and the game rounding operation is terminated based on the end trigger as one of the game rounds. A function of executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, the sound light side MPU 82, which controls the game executing means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the diversion operation is executed. The display side MPU92) has a function of executing the processes of steps S1401 to S1406 in the above.
The game control means is an operation period determining means (mainly in the first and fourth embodiments) for determining an operation execution period (variation duration of game times or execution period of game times) in which the game rotation operation is executed. A function of executing the processing of steps S601 to S614 in the side MPU 62, a function of executing the processing of steps S2201 to S2214 in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps S2201 to S2214 in the main MPU 62, and in the third embodiment, steps S261 to S261 in the main MPU 62. The function of executing the process of step S2614, the function of executing the process of steps S291 to S2910 in the main MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment, and the function of executing the process of steps S3001 to S3013 in the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment. The function of executing the process of steps S3301 to S3303 in the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment) is provided.
The profit-giving event has a configuration that occurs after the game circulation operation corresponding to the profit-giving is completed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5, wherein the target period is the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period.

According to the feature A6, the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period varies depending on the player's advantage. Then, when the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period fluctuates, the period required until the game circulation operation corresponding to the grant of profit is completed fluctuates, and the profit is given by the fluctuation of the period. The period required to complete the process will vary. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the situation determining means changes the mode of determining the operation execution period by the operating period determining means according to the advantage of the player.

According to the feature A7, when the operation execution period of the game rotation operation is changed according to the advantage of the player, the mode of determining the operation execution period by the operation period determining means is changed. As a result, it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player while utilizing the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature A8. A period information group in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set (the first to fourth base sequence tables 185 to 188 in the fifth embodiment, the normal period table 191 and the shortened period table 192 in the sixth embodiment, In the seventh embodiment, an information storage means (main side ROM 63) for storing a plurality of types of the first to third base sequence tables (195 to 197) is provided.
The operation period determining means determines the operation execution period by referring to the period information group of the type according to the game situation.
The plurality of types of the period information groups are set so that the average period of the operation execution period determined by being referred to by the operation period determining means is different.
The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the situation determining means makes the type of the period information group referred to by the operating period determining means different according to the advantage of the player.

According to the feature A8, the type of the period information group referred to by the operation period determining means is different depending on the advantage of the player, so that the type of the period information group to be referred to is different. With this simple configuration, it is possible to change the average period of the operation execution period.

Feature A9. In the information storage means, as the period information group, the average period of the operation execution period is shorter than that of the first period information group (normal period table 191 in the sixth embodiment) and the first period information group. At least the second period information group (shortening period table 192 in the sixth embodiment) is stored.
The operation period determining means is
The operation execution period with reference to the first period information group in the first game situation (when the number of hold information on the second special figure side is less than two in the high frequency support mode). (A function of executing the process of step S3007 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment) and
In the second game situation (when the number of reserved information on the second special figure side is two or more in the high frequency support mode), the operation execution period is referred to with reference to the second period information group. (A function of executing the process of step S3009 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment) and
With
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the situation determining means makes the operation period determining means refer to the first period information group even in the second gaming situation (the first). The gaming machine according to feature A8, characterized in that (a function of executing an affirmative determination in step S3008 of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment of 6).

According to the feature A9, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the second period information group, which has a shorter average period of the operation execution period than the first period information group in the operation execution determining means, should be the original. The first period information group will be referred to where it is referred to. As a result, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the average period of the operation execution period can be lengthened, and the game circulation operation corresponding to the granting of profit ends accordingly. The period required for making a profit becomes longer, and the period required for profit to be granted becomes longer due to the fluctuation of the period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

Further, the first period information group to be referred to by the operation period determining means even in the second gaming situation when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage is the operating period determining means in the first gaming situation. It is a period information group referred to by. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated period information group in response to the case where the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, so that the above-mentioned excellent is achieved while suppressing the increase in the required storage capacity. It becomes possible to play an effect.

Feature A10. The situation determining means changes the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means according to the player's advantage (the function of executing the period adjusting process of the main MPU 62 in the first to fourth embodiments). ) The gaming machine according to the feature A6.

According to the feature A10, when the operation execution period of the game rotation operation is changed according to the advantage of the player, the operation period determination mode is not changed by the operation period determination means, but the operation period is determined. The operation execution period determined by the means is changed. As a result, it is possible to change the operation execution period according to the advantage of the player while maintaining the operation execution period determination mode in the operation period determination means in a predetermined mode. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature A11. When the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is changed according to the player's advantage, the situation determining means corresponds to the length of the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means. The gaming machine according to feature A10, which is characterized in that it is varied by (a function of executing a period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment).

According to the feature A11, when the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is changed according to the player's advantage, the variation is made in an manner according to the length of the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means. Is done. As a result, it is possible to change the operation execution period so that the appropriate provision of profits to the player becomes effective.

Feature A12. The situation determining means
When the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage, means for extending the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means by an additional period (step S2802-of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment). (Function to execute the process of step S2804) and
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage, which is higher than the first predetermined advantage, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is set to two or more natural numbers of the additional period. Means for lengthening several times (a function of executing the processes of steps S2807 to S2811 of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment) and
The gaming machine according to A10 or A11.

According to the feature A12, when the player's advantage becomes high, the operation execution period becomes longer than before, and the operation execution period becomes longer than before, so that the game can be used to give a profit. The period required for the operation to be completed becomes longer than before, and the period required for the profit to be granted due to the fluctuation of the period becomes longer than before. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

In addition, the operation execution period is gradually lengthened according to the player's advantage. Therefore, the higher the advantage of the player, the longer the operation execution period is, and the longer the operation execution period is, the longer it takes to complete the game revolving operation corresponding to the granting of profit. The period becomes longer step by step, and the period required for the profit to be granted becomes longer step by step as the period becomes longer. As a result, it is possible to gradually enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time.

Further, when the operation period determining means is gradually lengthened, the natural number is increased when the natural number multiple of the additional period is added to the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means. As a result, the required storage capacity can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which a plurality of types of additional periods are prepared in advance.

Feature A13. When the operation period determining means changes the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means according to the player's advantage, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is the first operation execution period and A feature characterized in that the same period is changed from the operation execution period in any of the second operation execution periods (a function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the first to third embodiments). The gaming machine according to any one of A10 to A12.

According to the feature A13, when the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is changed according to the advantage of the player, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is the first operation execution period and the second operation execution period. Since the same period is changed from the operation execution period regardless of the operation execution period, it is possible to simplify the configuration for changing the operation execution period.

Feature A14. The game control means executes the game rotation operation by controlling the game execution means according to an operation mode information group (data table for game rotation production) stored in advance in the specific storage means (sound light side ROM 83). To be done,
The situation determining means changes the operation execution period according to the player's advantage by processing the operation mode information group corresponding to the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means (first). The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A13, characterized in that (a function of executing the processes of steps S1706 and S1707 of the sound light side MPU 82 in the embodiment).

According to the feature A14, the operation execution period is changed according to the player's advantage by processing the operation mode information group corresponding to the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means. It is possible to change the operation execution period according to the player's advantage while not increasing the number of operation mode information groups stored in the storage means in advance.

Feature A15. It is a configuration in which a variable display of a pattern is performed in the game rotation operation.
As the display mode of the pattern in the variation display of the pattern, a high identification display mode (low-speed fluctuation display) and a low identification display mode (high-speed fluctuation display) in which the distinctiveness of the pattern by appearance is relatively high or low are set. ,
As a mode of variable display of the pattern, after the state in which all the patterns are displayed in the low identification display mode continues for a predetermined period, the predetermined pattern is switched to the state in which the predetermined pattern is displayed in the high identification display mode. Has a mode,
The situation determining means changes the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means according to the player's advantage by varying the period during which all the patterns are displayed in the low identification display mode ( The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A14, characterized in that (a function of executing the processes of steps S1706 and S1707 of the sound light side MPU 82 in the first embodiment).

According to the feature A15, by varying the period displayed in the low identification display mode, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is changed according to the player's advantage. It is not necessary to store the information for determining the mode of the variable display of the pattern corresponding to each of the patterns whose execution period can be changed. Further, when the operation execution period is changed, the period in which all the symbols are displayed in the low identification display mode is changed. Therefore, the variable display mode of the symbols is processed according to the fluctuation in the operation execution period. Even if it does, it will be difficult to give the player a sense of discomfort.

Feature A16. Special transition means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high accuracy jackpot result) that is advantageous to the player (a function of executing the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) With
The game control means is a means (main side) for causing an operation result corresponding to the transition to the special gaming state after the end of the game rotation operation and the end of the game rotation operation. It is provided with a function of executing the processing of step S506 and step S703 in the MPU 62, and a function of executing the processing of step S1703 in the sound light side MPU 82).
When the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage (third reference value), the situation-determining means sets the operation execution period of the game rotation operation, which is to shift to the special gaming state, to a predetermined length. Long-term selection means for making the period longer than the previous period (the function of executing the process of step S604 of the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment, the process of step S2204 of the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A15, which comprises a function of executing the above-mentioned function, and in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2604 of the main MPU 62).

According to the feature A16, when the advantage of the player becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the operation execution period of the game rotation operation, which is to shift to the special gaming state, is longer than the period of the predetermined length. Become. As a result, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, it is possible to prevent the period required for the special gaming state from occurring to be less than the predetermined length period, which is short. It is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in time.

Feature A17. The long-term selection means is characterized in that, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the operation execution period for shifting to the special gaming state is set to the longest period in the operation execution period. The gaming machine according to the feature A16.

According to the feature A17, the operation execution period of the game rotation operation, which shifts to the special gaming state when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, is the longest period in the operation execution period. As a result, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the period required for the special gaming state to occur can be surely lengthened, and an excessively large profit is given to the player in a short time. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is given.

Feature A18. The longest period is a period longer than the longest period in the operation execution period that can be determined by the operation period determining means when the advantage of the player is less than the predetermined advantage A17. The game machine described in.

According to the feature A18, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the operation execution period of the game rotation operation that shifts to the special gaming state is set, and the player's advantage is the predetermined advantage. If it is less than, the operation execution period is longer than the longest operation execution period that can be selected. As a result, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the period required for the special gaming state to occur can be surely lengthened, and the player's advantage becomes the predetermined advantage. It is possible to set the operation execution period different from the case where it is less than.

Feature A19. When the game rotation operation is performed for the longest period, a notification (remaining time image G3) that allows the player to recognize the remaining period until the game rotation operation is completed is executed. The gaming machine according to feature A17 or A18, which comprises means (sound light side MPU 82, display side MPU 92).

According to the feature A19, when the game rotation operation is performed for the longest period, the notification is executed so that the player can recognize the remaining period until the game rotation operation is completed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious about the fact that the game rotation operation is not completed when the game rotation operation having the longest operation execution period is performed. Become.

Feature A20. A predetermined gaming state (5R high-accuracy jackpot result, 2R high-accuracy jackpot result or small hit result) that is an advantageous gaming state for the player and has a lower advantage than the special gaming state. ) Is provided with a predetermined transfer means (a function of executing the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) to transfer the game state.
The situation determining means determines the operation execution period of the game rotation operation that shifts to the predetermined game state even in a situation where the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage. The gaming machine according to any one of features A16 to A19, characterized in that it can be a period of length.

According to the feature A20, when the advantage of the player is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the operation execution period of the game rotation operation that shifts to the special gaming state is set to be longer than the period of the predetermined length. On the other hand, the operation execution period of the game rotation operation, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player and is a game state that is less advantageous than the special game state, is a predetermined length. It can be a period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time while suppressing an excessively long operation execution period.

Feature A21. The game rounding operation is started based on the start trigger, and the game rounding operation is terminated based on the end trigger as one of the game rounds. A function of executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, the sound light side MPU 82, which controls the game executing means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the diversion operation is executed. The display side MPU92) has a function of executing the processes of steps S1401 to S1406 in the above.
The profit-giving event has a configuration that occurs after the game circulation operation corresponding to the profit-giving is completed.
In the game rotation operation, a variable display of a pattern is performed, and after the variable display of the pattern is performed, a predetermined stop pattern is displayed for a stop display period (final stop period of the game round). It is a configuration in which the stop display is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A20, wherein the target period is the stop display period.

According to the feature A21, the stop display period varies according to the player's advantage. Then, the period required until the game circulation operation corresponding to the grant of profit is completed changes due to the change in the stop display period, and the period required for the profit is granted due to the change in the period. To do. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature A22. It is equipped with a special transition means (a function to execute the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) that shifts the gaming state to a special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player.
The special gaming state includes a first period in which the predetermined profit-giving event can occur (the special electric winning device 32 is open) and a second period in which the predetermined profit-giving event does not occur (opening period, interval period, ending). Period), including
The target period is the second period (a function of executing the selection process of the final stop period of the main MPU 62 in the first to third embodiments, a function of executing the selection process of the opening period, and the selection process of the interval period. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A21, characterized in that (a function of executing the function of executing the above and a function of executing the selection process of the ending period).

According to the feature A22, the second period in the special gaming state varies according to the player's advantage. Then, as the second period fluctuates, the period required until the first period in which a predetermined profit-giving event can occur changes. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately give profits to the player. Further, since the first period itself does not fluctuate, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while keeping the expected number of occurrences of a predetermined profit-giving event in the special gaming state unchanged.

Feature A23. In the special gaming state, the second period is configured to occur more than once.
The gaming machine according to feature A22, wherein the situation determining means varies from each of the plurality of second periods according to the player's advantage.

According to the feature A23, since each of the plurality of second periods in the special gaming state changes according to the player's advantage, it is possible to increase the number of periods to be changed, and one second period. It is possible to increase the total fluctuation amount of the second period in the special gaming state without excessively increasing the fluctuation amount of.

Feature A24. The situation-determining means makes the target period longer than the normal gaming state in an advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than the normal gaming state (steps S3105-of the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment). The function of executing the processes of steps S3106 and S3108 to S3109, the function of executing the process of step S3407 of the main MPU 62 in the eighth embodiment, and the process of step S3507 of the main MPU 62 in the ninth embodiment are executed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A2 to A23.

According to the feature A24, the target period is longer than the normal gaming state in the advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than the normal gaming state. Then, since the target period is longer than the normal gaming state, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event is longer than that of the normal gaming state, and the longer the period makes the profit from the predetermined timing. The period required for is granted is longer than in the normal gaming state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature A25. There are at least the first transition trigger (5R high probability jackpot result) and the second transition trigger (10R high probability jackpot result) as the transition trigger of the advantageous period.
It is more advantageous for the player that the second transition opportunity occurs than the first transition opportunity occurs.
The situation determining means
Means for making the target period longer than the normal gaming state in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (processing of steps S3 105-step S3106 of the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment). Function to execute) and
Means for making the target period longer in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity than the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (main in the seventh embodiment). (Function to execute the processes of steps S3108 to S3109) of the side MPU 62)
The gaming machine according to the feature A24, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature A25, in the configuration in which the target period is longer than the normal gaming state in the advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than the normal gaming state, the target period is longer as the advantageous period generated by the transition opportunity with the higher advantage occurs. Become. Therefore, the more advantageous period is generated by the transition opportunity with higher advantage, the longer the period required from the predetermined timing until the profit is given. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature A26. There are at least the first transition trigger (5R high probability jackpot result) and the second transition trigger (10R high probability jackpot result) as the transition trigger of the advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than the normal gaming state.
It is more advantageous for the player that the second transition opportunity occurs than the first transition opportunity occurs.
The situation-determining means makes the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity longer than the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (first). 7. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A25, characterized in that (a function of executing the processes of steps S3105 to S3106 and steps S3108 to S3109) of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment of 7.

According to the feature A26, in a configuration in which it is more advantageous for the player to have the second transition trigger than to have the first transition trigger, the target period in the advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than the normal gaming state. The advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity is longer than the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity. Then, the longer the target period, the longer the period required from the predetermined timing until the predetermined profit-giving event occurs, and the longer the period, the longer the period required from the predetermined timing until the profit is granted. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature A27. The first transition opportunity is to shift to the first special gaming state.
The gaming machine according to feature A25 or A26, wherein the second transition trigger is a transition to a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state.

According to the feature A27, the higher the advantage of the special gaming state that triggers the transition of the advantageous period, the longer the target period in the advantageous period can be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

Feature A28. The gaming machine according to any one of features A24 to A27, wherein the situation-determining means cancels the situation in which the target period is extended when the advantageous period ends.

According to the feature A28, it is possible to limit the situation where the target period is extended within the range of one advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the target period from being excessively extended.

Feature A29. The gaming machine according to any one of features A24 to A28, wherein the situation-determining means does not change the target period set when the advantageous period starts until the advantageous period ends.

According to the feature A29, since the target period does not change in the middle of the advantageous period, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature A30. A lottery means (a function to execute the process of step S503 in the main MPU 62) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to the special game state (open / close execution mode) based on the occurrence of the lottery opportunity, and
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is the transition result corresponding to the shift of the gaming state to the special gaming state, the special transition means for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state (start of special electric power in the main MPU 62). Function to execute processing) and
In the special gaming state, the lottery by the lottery means is not performed.
As the gaming states in which the lottery opportunity can occur, there are at least a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
The advantageous period is described in any one of features A24 to A29, which is a period in which at least one of the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state continues without sandwiching the normal gaming state. Game machine.

According to the feature A30, when the situation favorable to the player continues, it is possible to continue the situation in which the target period is extended.

Feature A31. The situation determining means
Based on the predetermined game history due to the game being played, the predetermined history information (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth embodiments, the target ball output rate in the second embodiment, the first Information grasping means for grasping the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment (total round number counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth embodiments, target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment, In the third embodiment, the consecutive villa counter 181) and
Information correspondence determining means for determining the subsequent game situation based on the predetermined history information (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S602 to S604 in the main MPU 62, executing the cycle setting process in the main MPU 62). Function to execute the period adjustment process in the main MPU 62, the function to execute the final stop period selection process in the main MPU 62, the function to execute the opening period selection process in the main MPU 62, the interval period in the main MPU 62. Function to execute the selection process of the main MPU 62, the function to execute the selection process of the ending period in the main MPU 62, the function to execute the cycle setting process in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, steps S2201 to S2204 in the main MPU 62 A function of executing a process, a function of executing a period adjustment process in the main MPU 62, a function of executing a cycle setting process in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment, and a function of executing steps S2601 to S2604 in the main MPU 62. A function, a function of executing a period adjustment process in the main MPU 62, a function of executing a period adjustment process in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment, and a process of steps S291 to S2907 in the main MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment. A function to execute, in the sixth embodiment, a function to execute the process of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main MPU 62) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A30, characterized in that

According to the feature A31, the predetermined history information is grasped based on the predetermined game history due to the game being played, and the subsequent game situation is determined based on the grasped predetermined history information. As a result, the subsequent game situation changes according to the predetermined game history, so that it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature A32. The gaming machine according to feature A31, wherein the predetermined history information fluctuates according to the profit given to the player.

According to the feature A32, in a configuration in which the predetermined history information fluctuates according to the profit given to the player, the subsequent game situation is determined based on the predetermined history information. As a result, the subsequent game situation changes according to the profit given to the player, so that it is possible to appropriately give the profit to the player.

Feature A33. The profit-giving means grants a game value that enables the game to be played as the profit.
The gaming machine according to feature A31 or A32, wherein the predetermined history information fluctuates according to the gaming value given to the player.

According to the feature A33, in a configuration in which the predetermined history information changes according to the game value given to the player, the subsequent game situation is determined based on the predetermined history information. As a result, the subsequent game situation changes according to the game value given to the player, so that it is possible to appropriately give the profit to the player.

Feature A34. The predetermined history information is information corresponding to the ratio of the number of game values given to the player to the number of game values used by the player (target ball output rate in the second embodiment). The gaming machine according to the feature A33.

According to the feature A34, the subsequent game situation is determined according to the ratio of the number of game values given to the player to the number of game values used by the player. As a result, the subsequent game situation changes according to the increase in the game value owned by the player, so that it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature A35. The second predetermined period (in the first embodiment, the round game) in which the expected value of giving the profit is higher than the first predetermined period (other than the round game in the first embodiment, other than the open / close execution mode in the third embodiment). , The function of executing the processes of steps S912 and S1107 in the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment, and in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment, the period generating means for generating the opening / closing execution mode in the third embodiment. Equipped with a function to execute special electric start processing)
The gaming machine according to feature A31, wherein the predetermined history information fluctuates according to the number of occurrences in the second predetermined period.

According to the feature A35, in the configuration in which the predetermined history information fluctuates according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period in which the expected value of giving profit is higher than the first predetermined period, the subsequent game situation is determined based on the predetermined history information. It is determined. As a result, the subsequent game situation changes according to the number of occurrences in the second predetermined period, so that it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature A36. The gaming machine according to feature A35, wherein the information grasping means updates the predetermined history information before the end of the second predetermined period when it is determined that the second predetermined period occurs. ..

According to the feature A36, when it is determined that the second predetermined period occurs, the predetermined history information is updated before the end of the second predetermined period, so that the player's profit fluctuates quickly. It is possible to change the game situation after that.

Feature A37. A supply means (game ball launch mechanism 27) for supplying a game ball to the game area (game area PA), and
A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided so as to be able to switch between the open state and the closed state, and
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S912, S1003, and step S1107 in the main MPU 62) that executes the variable ball entry control that switches the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable entry means is set to the open state. ,
A special transition means (a function of executing the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state (open / close execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed, and
With
The gaming machine according to feature A35 or A36, wherein the second predetermined period is a predetermined period during which the variable ball entering means is in the open state in the special gaming state.

According to the feature A37, in a configuration in which the predetermined history information changes according to a predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is opened in the special game state, the subsequent game situation is determined based on the predetermined history information. As a result, the subsequent game situation changes according to the number of occurrences of the variable ball entry means in the open state in the special game state, so that the profit can be appropriately given to the player. It becomes possible to do.

Feature A38. As the special gaming state, the number of times during which the first special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high-accuracy jackpot result) and the period during which the variable ball entering means is in the open state occurs is the first special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature A37, characterized in that at least a second special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result) exists.

According to the feature A38, the variable ball-entry means is in the open state in the special game state in the configuration in which the number of times the variable ball-entry means is in the open state differs between the first special game state and the second special game state. The predetermined history information changes according to the predetermined period. As a result, it is possible to change the game situation in a manner corresponding to the profit actually given to the player, as compared with the configuration in which the predetermined history information is changed according to the number of occurrences of the special game state.

Feature A39. As the predetermined period, a predetermined first period (long-term mode) in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball-entry means is relatively large and a predetermined second period (short-term mode) in which the expected number of game balls is relatively small are relatively small. And at least exist
The gaming machine according to feature A37 or A38, wherein the second predetermined period includes the predetermined first period, but does not include the predetermined second period.

According to the feature A39, the predetermined history information fluctuates according to the number of occurrences of the predetermined first period in which the expected number of game balls to enter the variable ball entry means is relatively large, while the game to the variable ball entry means. The predetermined history information does not change depending on the number of occurrences in the predetermined second period in which the expected number of balls to enter is relatively small. This makes it possible to change the gaming situation in a manner corresponding to the profit actually given to the player.

Feature A40. Predetermined determination means (steps S503 and S505 in the main MPU 62) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode by high-frequency winning mode) that is advantageous to the player based on the occurrence of the determination opportunity. Function to execute the processing of) and
A special transition that shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means being a predetermined transition result (5R high accuracy jackpot result, 10R low accuracy jackpot result or 10R high accuracy jackpot result). Means (function to execute special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) and
A number storage means (ream villa counter 181) that stores information corresponding to a specific number of occurrences, and
The number of times so that the specific number of occurrences increases when the special gaming state occurs or occurs based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means becoming the predetermined transition result in an advantageous period advantageous to the player. An update means for updating the information of the storage means (a function of executing the process of step S2407 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment) and
With
The game according to any one of features A1 to A39, wherein the situation determining means determines a subsequent gaming situation based on the information corresponding to the specific number of occurrences stored in the number storage means. Machine.

According to the feature A40, the specific number of occurrences, which is the number of times the special gaming state has occurred based on the predetermined transition result in the advantageous period, is measured, and the subsequent gaming situation is determined based on the specific number of occurrences. As a result, the subsequent gaming situation will change according to the number of times the special gaming state has occurred based on the predetermined transition result in the advantageous period, so that the profit can be appropriately given to the player. It becomes possible to do.

Feature A41. The special transition means shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means becoming a specific transition result (2R high accuracy big hit result or small hit result).
The renewal means of the number-of-times storage means that increases the specific number of occurrences even if the special gaming state occurs based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means becoming the specific transition result in the advantageous period. The gaming machine according to feature A40, which is characterized in that information is not updated.

According to the feature A41, the occurrence of the special gaming state may or may not be reflected in the specific number of occurrences, depending on the type of the transition result in the predetermined determination means that triggered the transition of the special gaming state. .. As a result, it is possible to limit the types of transition results in the predetermined determination means that affect the game situation to the predetermined transition results, and it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature A42. The special gaming state that shifts based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means becoming the specific transition result is the special gaming state that shifts based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes the predetermined transition result. The gaming machine according to feature A41, which is characterized in that the advantage of the player is lower than that of the player.

According to the feature A42, even if a special gaming state having a low advantage occurs, the occurrence of the special gaming state is not reflected in the specific number of occurrences. As a result, it is possible to determine the subsequent gaming situation according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state having a high advantage in the advantageous period.

Feature A43. In the special gaming state, the determination by the predetermined determination means is not performed.
As the gaming states in which the determination trigger can occur, there are at least a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
The advantageous period is a period in which at least one of the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state continues without interposing the normal gaming state.
The renewal means executes the process of step S2413 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment of the means for renewing the number of times storage means so that the specific number of occurrences becomes 0 when the advantageous period ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features A40 to A42, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the feature A43, the specific number of occurrences is measured within the range of one advantageous period. This makes it possible to set the gaming situation according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state within the range of one advantageous period.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A43, any one of the features A1 to A43, the features B1 to B10, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. A supply means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for supplying a game ball to the game area (game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when the supply operation is performed by the player in a situation where the game ball can be supplied.
Profit (entry) to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means (general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) provided in the game area. If the entry of the game ball into any of the ball units 31 to 34 is a profit-giving event, the game ball is given, and if the game times corresponding to the jackpot result are the profit-giving event, the opening / closing execution mode is generated). Means (If the entry of the game ball into any of the entry units 31 to 34 is a profit-giving event, the function of executing the processes of steps S209 and S217 in the main MPU 62, the payout control device 77, and the jackpot result are supported. If the game to be played is a profit-giving event, the function of executing the processes of steps S409 to S412 in the main MPU 62) and
Cycle changing means for changing the predetermined cycle (a function of executing the cycle setting process in the main MPU 62 in the first to third embodiments, and in step S3105, step S3108 and step S3211 in the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment). A function to execute the process, a function to execute the process of step S3407 and step S3413 in the main MPU 62 in the eighth embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S3507 and step S3603 in the main MPU 62 in the ninth embodiment) When,
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, since the profit is given to the player based on the fact that the game ball flowing down the game area enters the predetermined ball entry means, the player has the game ball enter the predetermined ball entry means. The game will be played while expecting. In this case, the predetermined cycle in which the game ball is supplied to the game area is appropriately changed, and the frequency of the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means per unit time is also changed by changing the predetermined cycle. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately add the game value to the player.

Feature B2. The cycle changing means is the player's advantage (the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth embodiments, the target payout rate in the second embodiment, and the continuous in the third embodiment. The predetermined cycle is changed according to the value of the villa counter 181, the presence / absence of an advantageous period in the seventh embodiment, the presence / absence of an advantageous period in the eighth embodiment, and the presence / absence of the open / close execution mode in the ninth embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature B1.

According to the feature B2, the predetermined period in which the game ball is supplied to the game area is changed according to the advantage of the player. Then, as the predetermined cycle fluctuates, the frequency of the game ball entering the predetermined ball-entry means per unit time also changes, and the period required for the profit to be granted changes as the ball-entry frequency fluctuates. Will be done. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature B3. In the cycle changing means, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage (first reference value, second reference value or third reference value), or when the player's advantage becomes the predetermined advantage (first reference). The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein when the value is equal to or higher than the value, the second reference value, or the third reference value), the predetermined cycle is made longer than before.

According to the feature B3, when the advantage of the player becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage or when the advantage of the player becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the predetermined cycle becomes longer than before, and the predetermined cycle becomes until then. The longer the ball, the lower the frequency of the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means per unit time, and the lower the frequency of the ball entry, the longer the period required for the profit to be given. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature B4. As the predetermined advantage, at least a first predetermined advantage (first reference value) and a second predetermined advantage (second reference value) in which the player's advantage is higher than the first predetermined advantage are set. Has been
The cycle changing means
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage, the means for making the predetermined cycle longer than before ( In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1504, step S1603 and step S1604 in the main MPU 62, and in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2104, step S2303 and step S2304 in the main MPU 62. In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processes of step S2504, step S2703 and step S2704 in the main MPU 62) and
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage, the means for making the predetermined cycle longer than before ( In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1506, step S1606 and step S1607 in the main MPU 62, and in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2106, step S2306 and step S2307 in the main MPU 62. In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processes of step S2506, step S2706 and step S2707 in the main MPU 62) and
The gaming machine according to the feature B3, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature B4, the predetermined cycle is gradually lengthened according to the advantage of the player. Therefore, the higher the advantage of the player, the lower the frequency of the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means per unit time gradually, and the profit is given by gradually lowering the frequency of the ball entry. The time required for this is gradually increased. As a result, it is possible to gradually enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time.

Feature B5. The cycle changing means makes the predetermined cycle longer than the normal gaming state in an advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than the normal gaming state (step S3105 and step S3105 of the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment). A function of executing the process of step S3108, a function of executing the process of step S3407 of the main MPU 62 in the eighth embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S3507 of the main MPU 62 in the ninth embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B4.

According to the feature B5, the predetermined cycle becomes longer than the normal gaming state in the advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than the normal gaming state. Then, since the predetermined cycle becomes longer than the normal game state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means per unit time becomes lower than that in the normal game state, and it is profitable that the frequency of entering the ball becomes lower. The period required for is granted is longer than in the normal gaming state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature B6. There are at least the first transition trigger (5R high probability jackpot result) and the second transition trigger (10R high probability jackpot result) as the transition trigger of the advantageous period.
It is more advantageous for the player that the second transition opportunity occurs than the first transition opportunity occurs.
The cycle changing means
Means for making the predetermined cycle longer than the normal gaming state in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (process of step S3105 of the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment is executed. Function) and
Means for making the predetermined cycle longer in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity than the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (main in the seventh embodiment). (Function to execute the process of step S3108 of the side MPU 62) and
The gaming machine according to feature B5, characterized in that

According to the feature B6, in the configuration in which the predetermined cycle is longer than the normal gaming state in the advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than the normal gaming state, the predetermined cycle becomes longer as the advantageous period generated by the transition trigger with higher advantage occurs. Become. Therefore, the more advantageous period is generated by the transition opportunity with higher advantage, the longer the period required for the profit to be granted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature B7. There are at least the first transition trigger (5R high probability jackpot result) and the second transition trigger (10R high probability jackpot result) as the transition trigger of the advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than the normal gaming state.
It is more advantageous for the player that the second transition opportunity occurs than the first transition opportunity occurs.
The cycle changing means makes the predetermined cycle in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition trigger longer than the predetermined cycle in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition trigger (first). 7. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that (a function of executing the processes of steps S3105 and S3108 of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment).

According to feature B7, in a configuration in which it is more advantageous for the player to have the second transition trigger than to have the first transition trigger, a predetermined cycle in an advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than the normal gaming state. The advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity is longer than the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity. Then, as the predetermined cycle becomes longer, the frequency of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entering means per unit time also decreases, and as the frequency of entering the ball decreases, the period required for profit to be granted becomes longer. It will be. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature B8. The first transition opportunity is to shift to the first special gaming state.
The gaming machine according to feature B6 or B7, wherein the second transition trigger is a transition to a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state.

According to the feature B8, the higher the advantage of the special gaming state that triggers the transition of the advantageous period, the longer the predetermined cycle in the advantageous period can be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to any one of features B5 to B8, wherein the cycle changing means cancels the situation in which the predetermined cycle is extended when the advantageous period ends.

According to the feature B9, it is possible to limit the situation in which the predetermined cycle is extended within the range of one advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessive extension of a predetermined cycle from occurring.

Feature B10. A lottery means (a function to execute the process of step S503 in the main MPU 62) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to the special game state (open / close execution mode) based on the occurrence of the lottery opportunity, and
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is the transition result corresponding to the shift of the gaming state to the special gaming state, the special transition means for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state (start of special electric power in the main MPU 62). Function to execute processing) and
In the special gaming state, the lottery by the lottery means is not performed.
As the gaming states in which the lottery opportunity can occur, there are at least a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
The advantageous period is described in any one of features B5 to B9, characterized in that at least one of the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state continues without interposing the normal gaming state. Game machine.

According to the feature B10, when the situation favorable to the player continues, it is possible to continue the situation in which the predetermined cycle is extended.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of features B1 to B10, any one of features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, and features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A supply means (game ball launch mechanism 27) for supplying a game ball to the game area (game area PA), and
A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided so as to be able to switch between the open state and the closed state, and
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S912, S1003, and step S1107 in the main MPU 62) that executes the variable ball entry control that switches the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable entry means is set to the open state. ,
A special transition means (a function of executing the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state (open / close execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed, and
With
In the special gaming state, there is a first predetermined period (other than the round game in the open / close execution mode) in which the variable ball entering means is maintained in the closed state, and a period in which the variable ball entering means is in the open state. The second predetermined period (round game in the open / close execution mode), which is the period during which the variable ball entry means is terminated in the closed state based on the condition that the end condition is satisfied in the situation where the variable ball entry means is in the open state It is a configuration that occurs
This game machine is
Information grasping means (total number of rounds counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth embodiments) for grasping the predetermined number of occurrences, which is the number of occurrences of the predetermined second predetermined period, and
Based on the predetermined number of occurrences, the number of times corresponding determination means for determining the subsequent game situation (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of steps S602 to S604 in the main MPU 62, the cycle setting process in the main MPU 62 is executed. Function to execute the period adjustment process in the main MPU 62, the function to execute the final stop period selection process in the main MPU 62, the function to execute the opening period selection process in the main MPU 62, the interval period in the main MPU 62. The function of executing the selection process of, the function of executing the selection process of the ending period in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the period adjustment process in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment, and the function of executing the period adjustment process in the main MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment. A function of executing the process of steps S291 to S2907, a function of executing the process of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment), and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature C1, the subsequent gaming situation is determined based on the predetermined number of occurrences, which is the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is opened in the special gaming state. As a result, the subsequent game situation changes according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is opened in the special game state, so that the profit can be appropriately given to the player. It becomes possible to.

Feature C2. As the special game state, the first special game state (opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high accuracy jackpot result) and the second special game in which the number of times the second predetermined period occurs is different from the first special game state. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that at least a state (opening / closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low-accuracy jackpot result or a 10R high-accuracy jackpot result) exists.

According to the feature C2, in the configuration in which the number of times the second predetermined period occurs differs between the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state, the second predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is opened in the special gaming state. The subsequent game situation is determined based on the predetermined number of occurrences, which is the number of occurrences of. As a result, it is possible to change the gaming situation in a manner corresponding to the profit actually given to the player, as compared with the configuration in which the subsequent gaming situation is determined according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state.

Feature C3. As the second predetermined period, a predetermined first period (long-term mode) in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball-entry means is relatively large and a predetermined second period (short-term mode) in which the expected number of game balls is relatively small are relatively small. ) And at least exist
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the predetermined second predetermined period includes the predetermined first period, but does not include the predetermined second period.

According to the feature C3, the predetermined number of occurrences varies depending on the number of occurrences in the predetermined first period in which the expected number of game balls to enter the variable entry means is relatively large, while the game to the variable entry means. The predetermined number of occurrences does not change depending on the number of occurrences in the predetermined second period in which the expected number of balls to enter is relatively small. This makes it possible to change the gaming situation in a manner corresponding to the profit actually given to the player.

Feature C4. Target period (in the first embodiment, the firing cycle, the fluctuation duration of the game times, the final stop period of the game times, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening / closing execution mode, the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode, the fourth In the embodiment, the fluctuation duration of the game times, and in the fifth to sixth embodiments, the average of the fluctuation durations of the game times) fluctuates, so that the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event is It is a variable configuration,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the number-of-times correspondence determining means changes the target period according to the predetermined number of occurrences.

According to the feature C4, in the configuration in which the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event can be changed due to the fluctuation of the target period, the subsequent target period is set according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period. Fluctuate. Then, as the target period changes, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event changes. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature C5. The number-of-times correspondence determining means is used when the predetermined number of occurrences is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value (first reference value, second reference value or third reference value) or when the predetermined number of occurrences is a predetermined reference value (first reference value). , The second reference value or the third reference value) or more, the gaming machine according to the feature C4, characterized in that the target period is made longer than before.

According to the feature C5, when the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period exceeds the predetermined reference value or the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period exceeds the predetermined reference value, the target period becomes longer than before, and the target Since the period is longer than before, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event becomes longer. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature C6. As the predetermined reference value, at least a first reference value (first reference value) and a second reference value (second reference value) which is a value larger than the first reference value are set.
The means for determining the number of times is
When the predetermined number of occurrences is equal to or greater than the first reference value, or when the predetermined number of occurrences is equal to or greater than the first reference value, the means for making the target period longer than before (first implementation). The function of executing the processes of step S1504, step S1603, and step S1604 of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment) and
When the predetermined number of occurrences is equal to or greater than the second reference value, or when the predetermined number of occurrences is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the means for making the target period longer than before (first implementation). The function of executing the processes of step S1506, step S1606 and step S1607 of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment) and
The gaming machine according to feature C5, characterized in that

According to the feature C6, the target period is gradually lengthened according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period. Therefore, as the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period increases, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event becomes longer in stages. As a result, it is possible to gradually enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time.

Feature C7. The supply means supplies the game ball to the game area (game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when the supply operation is performed by the player in a situation where the game ball can be supplied.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C6, wherein the target period is the predetermined cycle.

According to the feature C7, the predetermined period in which the game ball is supplied to the game area is changed according to the number of occurrences in the second predetermined period. Then, as the predetermined cycle fluctuates, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event changes. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature C8. The game rounding operation is started based on the start trigger, and the game rounding operation is terminated based on the end trigger as one of the game rounds. A function of executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, the sound light side MPU 82, which controls the game executing means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the diversion operation is executed. The display side MPU92) has a function of executing the processes of steps S1401 to S1406 in the above.
The game control means is an operation period determining means (mainly in the first and fourth embodiments) for determining an operation execution period (variation duration of game times or execution period of game times) in which the game rotation operation is executed. A function of executing the processing of steps S601 to S614 in the side MPU 62, a function of executing the processing of steps S2201 to S2214 in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps S2201 to S2214 in the main MPU 62, and in the third embodiment, steps S261 to S261 in the main MPU 62. The function of executing the process of step S2614, the function of executing the process of steps S291 to S2910 in the main MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment, and the function of executing the process of steps S3001 to S3013 in the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment. The function of executing the process of steps S3301 to S3303 in the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment) is provided.
The profit-giving event has a configuration that occurs after the game circulation operation corresponding to the profit-giving is completed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C7, wherein the target period is the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period.

According to the feature C8, the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period fluctuates according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period. Then, when the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period fluctuates, the period required until the game circulation operation corresponding to the grant of profit is completed fluctuates, and the profit is given by the fluctuation of the period. The period required to complete the process will vary. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature C9. The number-of-times correspondence determining means changes the mode of determining the operation execution period by the operation period determining means according to the predetermined number of occurrences (in the fifth embodiment, the processes of steps S2901 to S2907 in the main MPU 62 are executed. The gaming machine according to feature C8, characterized in that, in the sixth embodiment, the function of executing the process of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main MPU 62).

According to the feature C9, when the operation execution period of the game rotation operation is changed according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period, the mode of determining the operation execution period by the operation period determining means is changed. As a result, it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player while utilizing the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature C10. A period information group in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set (the first to fourth base sequence tables 185 to 188 in the fifth embodiment, the normal period table 191 and the shortened period table 192 in the sixth embodiment, In the seventh embodiment, an information storage means (main side ROM 63) for storing a plurality of types of the first to third base sequence tables (195 to 197) is provided.
The operation period determining means determines the operation execution period by referring to the period information group of the type according to the game situation.
The plurality of types of the period information groups are set so that the average period of the operation execution period determined by being referred to by the operation period determining means is different.
The gaming machine according to feature C9, wherein the number-of-times correspondence determination means makes the type of the period information group referred to by the operation period determination means different according to the predetermined number of occurrences.

According to the feature C10, the type of the period information group referred to by the operation period determining means is configured to be different according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period, so that the type of the period information group to be referred to can be selected. It is possible to change the average period of the operation execution period by a simple configuration of making them different.

Feature C11. In the information storage means, as the period information group, the average period of the operation execution period is shorter than that of the first period information group (normal period table 191 in the sixth embodiment) and the first period information group. At least the second period information group (shortening period table 192 in the sixth embodiment) is stored.
The operation period determining means is
The operation execution period with reference to the first period information group in the first game situation (when the number of hold information on the second special figure side is less than two in the high frequency support mode). (A function of executing the process of step S3007 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment) and
In the second game situation (when the number of reserved information on the second special figure side is two or more in the high frequency support mode), the operation execution period is referred to with reference to the second period information group. (A function of executing the process of step S3009 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment) and
With
When the predetermined number of occurrences is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value, the number-of-times correspondence determining means causes the operation period determining means to refer to the first period information group even in the second gaming situation (the first). The gaming machine according to feature C10, characterized in that (a function of executing an affirmative determination in step S3008 of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment of 6).

According to the feature C11, when the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period is equal to or more than the predetermined reference value, the second period information group having an average period of the operation execution period shorter than that of the first period information group in the operation execution determining means The first period information group will be referred to where it would normally be referred to. As a result, when the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value, it is possible to lengthen the average period of the operation execution period, and accordingly, the game rounding operation corresponding to the granting of profit. The period required for the end of the process becomes longer, and the period required for the profit to be granted becomes longer due to the fluctuation of the period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

Further, when the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value, the first period information group to be referred to by the operation period determining means even in the second game situation is the operation period in the first game situation. It is a period information group referred to by a determination means. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated period information group in response to the case where the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period is equal to or more than the predetermined reference value, so that the increase in the required storage capacity is suppressed as described above. It is possible to produce an excellent effect.

Feature C12. The number-of-times correspondence determining means changes the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means according to the predetermined number of occurrences (a function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the first and fourth embodiments). ) The gaming machine according to the feature C8.

According to the feature C12, when the operation execution period of the game rotation operation is changed according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period, the operation execution period determination mode by the operation period determination means is not changed, but the operation. The operation execution period determined by the period determining means is changed. As a result, it is possible to change the operation execution period according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period while maintaining the operation execution period determination mode in the operation period determination means in a predetermined mode. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the operation period determining means.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of features C1 to C12, any one of features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, and features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A function of executing the processing of steps S503 and S505 in the main MPU 62 for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode). )When,
The game rounding operation is started based on the start trigger, and the game rounding operation is terminated based on the end trigger as one of the game rounds. A function of executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, the sound light side MPU 82, which controls the game executing means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the diversion operation is executed. Function to execute the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the above, display side MPU92), and
When the determination result by the predetermined determination means is a predetermined transition result (10R low accuracy jackpot result or 10R high accuracy jackpot result), the gaming state is changed to the special gaming state after the game rotation operation is completed. Special migration means to migrate (function to execute special electric start processing in main MPU 62) and
With
The game control means is an operation period determining means (in the first embodiment, steps S601 to S614 in the main MPU 62) for determining an operation execution period (variation continuation period of the game times) in which the game rotation operation is executed. A function to execute the process, a function to execute the process of steps S2201 to S2214 in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, a function to execute the process of steps S2601 to S2614 in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment) With
In a specific situation, the operation period determining means makes the operation execution period of the game rotation operation corresponding to the determination result by the predetermined determining means the predetermined transition result longer than the period of the predetermined length. Long-term selection means to be a period (a function of executing the process of step S604 of the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2204 of the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, a first In the third embodiment, the gaming machine includes a function of executing the process of step S2604 of the main MPU 62).

According to the feature D1, in the case of a specific situation, the operation execution period of the game rotation operation is a period of a predetermined length, in which the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes the predetermined transition result and the transition to the special gaming state is performed. It will be a longer period than. As a result, in a specific situation, it is possible to prevent the period required for the special gaming state to occur triggered by the predetermined transition result from becoming less than the predetermined length period, and in a short time. It is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the specific situation is a case where the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage (third reference value).

According to the feature D2, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes the predetermined transition result, so that the game is shifted to the special gaming state. The operation execution period is longer than the predetermined length period. As a result, when the player's advantage exceeds the predetermined advantage, the period required for the special gaming state to occur triggered by the predetermined transition result becomes less than or equal to the predetermined length period. It is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time, and it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit.

Feature D3. In the specific situation, the long-term selection means sets the operation execution period of the game rotation operation corresponding to the determination result by the predetermined determination means as the predetermined transition result to the longest period in the operation execution period. The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2.

According to the feature D3, in the case of a specific situation, the operation execution period of the game rotation operation, which shifts to the special game state when the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes the predetermined transition result, is the operation execution period. It will be the longest period. As a result, it is possible to surely lengthen the period required for the special gaming state to occur triggered by the predetermined transition result in a specific situation, and an excessively large profit is given to the player in a short time. It is possible to suppress the loss.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the longest period is a period longer than the longest period in the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means in a case other than the specific situation.

According to the feature D4, the game rotation operation that shifts to the special gaming state when the determination result by the predetermined determining means that shifts to the special gaming state in a specific situation becomes the predetermined transition result. The operation execution period is longer than the longest operation execution period selected when the situation is not specific. As a result, it is possible to surely lengthen the period required for the special gaming state to occur triggered by the predetermined transition result in the specific situation, and the operation execution period different from that in the non-specific situation. It becomes possible to.

Feature D5. When the game rotation operation is performed for the longest period, a notification (remaining time image G3) that allows the player to recognize the remaining period until the game rotation operation is completed is executed. The gaming machine according to feature D3 or D4, which comprises means (sound light side MPU 82, display side MPU 92).

According to the feature D5, when the game rotation operation is performed for the longest period, the notification is executed so that the player can recognize the remaining period until the game rotation operation is completed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious about the fact that the game rotation operation is not completed when the game rotation operation having the longest operation execution period is performed. Become.

Feature D6. A predetermined gaming state (5R high-accuracy jackpot result, 2R high-accuracy jackpot result or small hit result) that is an advantageous gaming state for the player and has a lower advantage than the special gaming state. ) Is provided with a predetermined transfer means (a function of executing the special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) to transfer the game state.
The operation period determining means is characterized in that even in the specific situation, the operation execution period of the game rotation operation that shifts to the predetermined gaming state can be a period of the predetermined length. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D5.

According to the feature D6, in a specific situation, the operation execution period of the game rotation operation, which shifts to the special gaming state when the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes the predetermined transition result, is longer than the period of the predetermined length. Although it is considered to be a long period of time, the operation execution of the game rotation operation that shifts to a predetermined game state which is a game state which is advantageous for the player and has a lower advantage than the special game state. The period can be a period of a predetermined length. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time while suppressing an excessively long operation execution period.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of features D1 to D6, any one of features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, and features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Predetermined determination means (steps S503 and S505 in the main MPU 62) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode by high-frequency winning mode) that is advantageous to the player based on the occurrence of the determination opportunity. Function to execute the processing of) and
A special transition that shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means being a predetermined transition result (5R high accuracy jackpot result, 10R low accuracy jackpot result or 10R high accuracy jackpot result). Means (function to execute special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) and
A number storage means (ream villa counter 181) that stores information corresponding to a specific number of occurrences, and
The number of times so that the specific number of occurrences increases when the special gaming state occurs or occurs based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means becoming the predetermined transition result in an advantageous period advantageous to the player. An update means for updating the information of the storage means (a function of executing the process of step S2407 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment) and
A specific response determining means for determining a subsequent game situation based on the information corresponding to the specific occurrence number stored in the number storage means (a function of executing a cycle setting process in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment). The function of executing the processing of steps S2601 to S2604 in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the period adjustment processing in the main MPU 62), and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, the specific number of occurrences, which is the number of times the special gaming state has occurred based on the predetermined transition result in the advantageous period, is measured, and the subsequent gaming situation is determined based on the specific number of occurrences. As a result, the subsequent gaming situation will change according to the number of times the special gaming state has occurred based on the predetermined transition result in the advantageous period, so that the profit can be appropriately given to the player. It becomes possible to do.

Feature E2. The special transition means shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means becoming a specific transition result (2R high accuracy big hit result or small hit result).
The renewal means of the number-of-times storage means that increases the specific number of occurrences even if the special gaming state occurs based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means becoming the specific transition result in the advantageous period. The gaming machine according to feature E1, which is characterized in that information is not updated.

According to the feature E2, the occurrence of the special gaming state may or may not be reflected in the specific number of occurrences, depending on the type of the transition result in the predetermined determination means that triggered the transition of the special gaming state. .. As a result, it is possible to limit the types of transition results in the predetermined determination means that affect the game situation to the predetermined transition results, and it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature E3. The special gaming state that shifts based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means becoming the specific transition result is the special gaming state that shifts based on the determination result by the predetermined determination means becomes the predetermined transition result. The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized in that the advantage of the player is lower than that of the player.

According to the feature E3, even if a special gaming state having a low advantage occurs, the occurrence of the special gaming state is not reflected in the specific number of occurrences. As a result, it is possible to determine the subsequent gaming situation according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state having a high advantage in the advantageous period.

Feature E4. In the special gaming state, the determination by the predetermined determination means is not performed.
As the gaming states in which the determination trigger can occur, there are at least a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
The advantageous period is a period in which at least one of the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state continues without interposing the normal gaming state.
The renewal means executes the process of step S2413 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment of the means for renewing the number of times storage means so that the specific number of occurrences becomes 0 when the advantageous period ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the feature E4, the specific number of occurrences is measured within the range of one advantageous period. This makes it possible to set the gaming situation according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state within the range of one advantageous period.

Feature E5. The target period (launch cycle in the third embodiment, fluctuation duration of game times, final stop period of game times, opening period of opening / closing execution mode, interval period of opening / closing execution mode, ending period of opening / closing execution mode) changes. As a result, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event can change.
The game according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the specific correspondence determining means changes the target period according to the information corresponding to the specific occurrence number of times stored in the number of times storage means. Machine.

According to the feature E5, in a configuration in which the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event can be changed due to the change in the target period, the subsequent target is according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period. The period is variable. Then, as the target period changes, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event changes. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature E6. The specific response determining means is used when the specific number of occurrences is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value (first reference value, second reference value or third reference value) or when the specific number of occurrences is a predetermined reference value (first reference value). , The second reference value or the third reference value) or more, the gaming machine according to the feature E5, characterized in that the target period is made longer than before.

According to the feature E6, when the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period exceeds the predetermined reference value or when the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period exceeds the predetermined reference value, the target period is longer than before. As the target period becomes longer and the target period becomes longer than before, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event becomes longer. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature E7. As the predetermined reference value, at least a first reference value (first reference value) and a second reference value (second reference value) which is a value larger than the first reference value are set.
The specific response determination means is
When the specific number of occurrences is equal to or greater than the first reference value, or when the specific number of occurrences is greater than or equal to the first reference value, the means for making the target period longer than before (third implementation). The function of executing the processes of step S2504, step S2703 and step S2704 of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment) and
When the specific number of occurrences is equal to or greater than the second reference value, or when the specific number of occurrences is greater than or equal to the second reference value, the means for making the target period longer than before (third implementation). The function of executing the processes of step S2506, step S2706 and step S2707 of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment) and
The gaming machine according to feature E6, characterized in that

According to the feature E7, the target period is gradually lengthened according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period. Therefore, as the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period increases, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event becomes longer in stages. As a result, it is possible to gradually enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time.

Feature E8. A supply means (game ball launch mechanism 27) for supplying a game ball to the game area (game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when the supply operation is performed by the player in a situation where the game ball can be supplied is provided.
The profit-giving event occurs based on the game ball entering the ball entry means (general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) provided in the game area. It is a configuration to
The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E7, wherein the target period is the predetermined cycle.

According to the feature E8, the predetermined cycle in which the game ball is supplied to the game area is changed according to the number of occurrences of the special game state in the advantageous period. Then, as the predetermined cycle fluctuates, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event changes. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature E9. The game rounding operation is started based on the start trigger, and the game rounding operation is terminated based on the end trigger as one of the game rounds. A function of executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, the sound light side MPU 82, which controls the game executing means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the diversion operation is executed. The display side MPU92) has a function of executing the processes of steps S1401 to S1406 in the above.
The game control means is an operation period determining means (in the third embodiment, in the main MPU 62) that determines an operation execution period (a variable duration of the game times or an execution period of the game times) in which the game rotation operation is executed. A function for executing the processes of steps S2601 to S2614) is provided.
The profit-giving event has a configuration that occurs after the game circulation operation corresponding to the profit-giving is completed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E8, wherein the target period is the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period.

According to the feature E9, the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period fluctuates according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period. Then, when the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period fluctuates, the period required until the game circulation operation corresponding to the grant of profit is completed fluctuates, and the profit is given by the fluctuation of the period. The period required to complete the process will vary. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature E10. The specific response determining means changes the mode of determining the operation execution period by the operation period determining means according to the information corresponding to the specific occurrence number stored in the number storage means (in the fifth embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature E9, which comprises a function of executing the processing of steps S291 to S2907 in the main MPU 62, and a function of executing the processing of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment). ..

According to the feature E10, when the operation execution period of the game rotation operation is changed according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period, the mode of determining the operation execution period by the operation period determining means is changed. As a result, it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player while utilizing the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature E11. A period information group in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set (the first to fourth base sequence tables 185 to 188 in the fifth embodiment, the normal period table 191 and the shortened period table 192 in the sixth embodiment, In the seventh embodiment, an information storage means (main side ROM 63) for storing a plurality of types of the first to third base sequence tables (195 to 197) is provided.
The operation period determining means determines the operation execution period by referring to the period information group of the type according to the game situation.
The plurality of types of the period information groups are set so that the average period of the operation execution period determined by being referred to by the operation period determining means is different.
The specific correspondence determining means is characterized in that the type of the period information group referred to by the operating period determining means is made different based on the information corresponding to the specific occurrence number stored in the number storage means. The gaming machine according to E10.

According to the feature E11, the type of the period information group referred to by the operation period determining means is different depending on the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period, so that the period information group to be referred to It is possible to change the average period of the operation execution period by a simple configuration of different types.

Feature E12. In the information storage means, as the period information group, the average period of the operation execution period is shorter than that of the first period information group (normal period table 191 in the sixth embodiment) and the first period information group. At least the second period information group (shortening period table 192 in the sixth embodiment) is stored.
The operation period determining means is
The operation execution period with reference to the first period information group in the first game situation (when the number of hold information on the second special figure side is less than two in the high frequency support mode). (A function of executing the process of step S3007 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment) and
In the second game situation (when the number of reserved information on the second special figure side is two or more in the high frequency support mode), the operation execution period is referred to with reference to the second period information group. (A function of executing the process of step S3009 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment) and
With
When the specific number of occurrences is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, the specific response determining means causes the operation period determining means to refer to the first period information group even in the second gaming situation (first). The gaming machine according to feature E11, characterized in that (a function of executing an affirmative determination in step S3008 of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment of 6).

According to the feature E12, when the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period is equal to or more than the predetermined reference value, the second period information in which the average period of the operation execution period is shorter than that of the first period information group in the operation execution determining means. Where the group would normally be referenced, the first period information group will be referenced. As a result, when the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value, the average period of the operation execution period can be lengthened, and the gaming times corresponding to the granting of profits accordingly. The period required for the operation to be completed becomes longer, and the period required for the profit to be granted becomes longer due to the fluctuation of the period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

Further, when the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference value, the first period information group to be referred to by the operation period determining means even in the second gaming situation is in the first gaming situation. It is a period information group referred to by the operation period determining means. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated period information group in response to the case where the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period is equal to or more than the predetermined reference value. Therefore, the above-mentioned increase in the required storage capacity is suppressed. It is possible to achieve such an excellent effect.

Feature E13. The specific response determining means changes the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means according to the information corresponding to the specific occurrence number stored in the number storage means (first and fourth implementations). The gaming machine according to feature E9, characterized in that (a function of executing a period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the embodiment).

According to the feature E13, when the operation execution period of the game rotation operation is changed according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period, the mode of determining the operation execution period by the operation period determining means is not changed. , The operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is changed. As a result, it is possible to change the operation execution period according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period while maintaining the operation execution period determination mode in the operation period determination means in a predetermined mode. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the operation period determining means.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of features E1 to E13, any one of features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, and features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. Profit is given to the player (ball entry section 31) based on the occurrence of a profit-giving event (the entry of the game ball into any of the entry sections 31 to 34, the game times corresponding to the jackpot result) due to the game being performed. If the entry of the game ball into any of ~ 34 is a profit-giving event, the game ball is given, and if the game times corresponding to the jackpot result is a profit-giving event, the opening / closing execution mode is generated). If the entry of the game ball into any of the ball units 31 to 34 is a profit-giving event, the function of executing the processes of steps S209 and S217 in the main MPU 62, the payout control device 77, and the game times corresponding to the jackpot result. If is a profit-giving event, the main MPU 62 is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S409 to S412).
By fluctuating the target period (the average of the firing cycle and the fluctuation duration of the game times in the seventh embodiment), the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event can be changed. ,
There are at least a first transition trigger (5R high-accuracy jackpot result) and a second transition trigger (10R high-accuracy jackpot result) as transition triggers for an advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than the normal gaming state.
The game machine determines a target period that makes the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity different from the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity. A gaming machine comprising means (in the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S3103 to S3109 and steps S3207 to S3212 in the main MPU 62).

According to the feature F1, the target period in the advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than that in the normal gaming state is the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity and the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity. It will be a different period with. Then, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event fluctuates due to the difference in the target period, and the period required from the predetermined timing until the profit is granted fluctuates due to the fluctuation of the period. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature F2. It is more advantageous for the player that the second transition opportunity occurs than the first transition opportunity occurs.
The target period determining means makes the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity longer than the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity ( The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that the processing of steps S3105 to S3106 and steps S3108 to S3109 of the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment is executed).

According to the feature F2, in a configuration in which it is more advantageous for the player to have the second transition trigger than to have the first transition trigger, the target period in the advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than the normal gaming state. The advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity is longer than the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity. Then, the longer the target period, the longer the period required from the predetermined timing until the predetermined profit-giving event occurs, and the longer the period, the longer the period required from the predetermined timing until the profit is granted. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature F3. The first transition opportunity is to shift to the first special gaming state.
The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein the second transition trigger is a transition to a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state.

According to the feature F3, the higher the advantage of the special gaming state that triggers the transition of the advantageous period, the longer the target period in the advantageous period can be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short time.

Feature F4. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, wherein the target period determining means sets the target period to a period corresponding to the normal gaming state when the advantageous period ends.

According to the feature F4, it is possible to limit the situation where the target period is changed within the range of one advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the target period from being excessively extended.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the target period determining means does not change the target period set when the advantageous period starts until the end of the advantageous period. ..

According to the feature F5, since the target period does not change in the middle of the advantageous period, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature F6. A lottery means (a function to execute the process of step S503 in the main MPU 62) for determining whether or not to shift the game state to the special game state (open / close execution mode) based on the occurrence of the lottery opportunity, and
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is the transition result corresponding to the shift of the gaming state to the special gaming state, the special transition means for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state (start of special electric power in the main MPU 62). Function to execute processing) and
In the special gaming state, the lottery by the lottery means is not performed.
As the gaming states in which the lottery opportunity can occur, there are at least a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.
Described in any one of features F1 to F5, wherein the advantageous period is a period in which at least one of the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state continues without sandwiching the normal gaming state. Game machine.

According to the feature F6, if the situation favorable to the player continues, the situation in which the target period is changed can be continued.

Feature F7. A supply means (game ball launch mechanism 27) for supplying a game ball to the game area (game area PA) at a predetermined cycle when the supply operation is performed by the player in a situation where the game ball can be supplied is provided.
The profit-giving event occurs based on the game ball entering the ball entry means (general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) provided in the game area. It is a configuration to
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, wherein the target period is the predetermined cycle.

According to the feature F7, the predetermined cycle in which the game ball is supplied to the game area is changed according to the type of the transition trigger to the advantageous period. Then, as the predetermined cycle fluctuates, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event changes. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature F8. The game rounding operation is started based on the start trigger, and the game rounding operation is terminated based on the end trigger as one of the game rounds. A function of executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, the sound light side MPU 82, which controls the game executing means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the diversion operation is executed. The display side MPU92) has a function of executing the processes of steps S1401 to S1406 in the above.
The game control means is an operation period determining means (in the third embodiment, in the main MPU 62) that determines an operation execution period (a variable duration of the game times or an execution period of the game times) in which the game rotation operation is executed. A function for executing the processes of steps S2601 to S2614) is provided.
The profit-giving event has a configuration that occurs after the game circulation operation corresponding to the profit-giving is completed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, wherein the target period is the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period.

According to the feature F8, the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period varies depending on the type of the transition trigger to the advantageous period. Then, when the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period fluctuates, the period required until the game circulation operation corresponding to the grant of profit is completed fluctuates, and the profit is given by the fluctuation of the period. The period required to complete the process will vary. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature F9. The target period determining means determines the mode of determining the operation execution period by the operating period determining means, that the target period and the second transition trigger in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition trigger have occurred. The gaming machine according to the feature F8, which is characterized by being different from the advantageous period based on the above.

According to the feature F9, when the operation execution period of the game rounding operation is changed according to the type of the transition trigger to the advantageous period, the mode of determining the operation execution period by the operation period determining means is changed. As a result, it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player while utilizing the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature F10. A period information group in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set (the first to fourth base sequence tables 185 to 188 in the fifth embodiment, the normal period table 191 and the shortened period table 192 in the sixth embodiment, In the seventh embodiment, an information storage means (main side ROM 63) for storing a plurality of types of the first to third base sequence tables (195 to 197) is provided.
The operation period determining means determines the operation execution period by referring to the period information group of the type according to the game situation.
The plurality of types of the period information groups are set so that the average period of the operation execution period determined by being referred to by the operation period determining means is different.
The target period determining means uses the type of the period information group referred to by the operating period determining means to generate the target period and the second transition trigger in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition trigger. The gaming machine according to feature F9, which is characterized in that it differs from the advantageous period based on the above.

According to the feature F10, the type of the period information group referred to by the operation period determining means is different depending on the type of the transition trigger to the advantageous period, so that the type of the period information group to be referred to is different. It is possible to change the average period of the operation execution period by a simple configuration of making them different.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F10, any one of the features A1 to A43, the features B1 to B10, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. A function of executing the processing of steps S503 and S505 in the main MPU 62 for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (opening / closing execution mode of the maximum number of rounds by the high frequency winning mode). )When,
The game rounding operation is started based on the start trigger, and the game rounding operation is terminated based on the end trigger as one of the game rounds. A function of executing the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main MPU 62, the sound light side MPU 82, which controls the game executing means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the diversion operation is executed. Function to execute the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the above, display side MPU92), and
When the determination result by the predetermined determination means is a predetermined transition result (10R low accuracy jackpot result or 10R high accuracy jackpot result), the gaming state is changed to the special gaming state after the game rotation operation is completed. Special migration means to migrate (function to execute special electric start processing in main MPU 62) and
With
The game control means is an operation period determining means (mainly in the first and fourth embodiments) for determining an operation execution period (variation duration of game times or execution period of game times) in which the game rotation operation is executed. A function of executing the processing of steps S601 to S614 in the side MPU 62, a function of executing the processing of steps S2201 to S2214 in the main MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps S2201 to S2214 in the main MPU 62, and in the third embodiment, steps S261 to S261 in the main MPU 62. The function of executing the process of step S2614) is provided.
In this game machine, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is set to the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first and fourth embodiments, and the target payout in the second embodiment. It is provided with a period variation means (a function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the first to fourth embodiments) that varies according to the rate and the value of the consecutive villa counter 181 in the third embodiment). A game machine featuring.

According to the feature G1, the operation execution period of the game rotation operation determined by the operation period determining means varies according to the advantage of the player. Then, as the operation execution period fluctuates, the period required until the game revolving operation corresponding to the transition to the special gaming state is completed fluctuates, and when the period fluctuates, the special gaming state occurs. The required period will fluctuate. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Further, when the operation execution period of the game rotation operation is changed according to the player's advantage, the operation period determination means is determined instead of the operation execution period determination mode by the operation period determination means. The operation execution period is changed. As a result, it is possible to change the operation execution period according to the advantage of the player while maintaining the operation execution period determination mode in the operation period determination means in a predetermined mode. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature G2. When the period changing means changes the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means according to the player's advantage, the mode varies according to the length of the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means. The gaming machine according to feature G1, which is characterized in that it is varied by (a function of executing a period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment).

According to the feature G2, when the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is changed according to the player's advantage, the variation is made in an manner according to the length of the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means. Is done. As a result, it is possible to change the operation execution period so that the appropriate provision of profits to the player becomes effective.

Feature G3. The period variation means
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage (first reference value), the means for extending the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means by an additional period (main in the fourth embodiment). (Function to execute the process of step S2802 to step S2804 of the side MPU 62) and
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage (second reference value), which is higher than the first predetermined advantage, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is added. A means for extending the period by two or more natural numbers (a function of executing the processes of steps S2807 to S2811 of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment) and
The gaming machine according to G1 or G2.

According to the feature G3, when the player's advantage becomes high, the operation execution period becomes longer than before, and the operation execution period becomes longer than before, so that the game can be used to give profits. The period required for the operation to be completed becomes longer than before, and the period required for the profit to be granted due to the fluctuation of the period becomes longer than before. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

In addition, the operation execution period is gradually lengthened according to the player's advantage. Therefore, the higher the advantage of the player, the longer the operation execution period is, and the longer the operation execution period is, the longer it takes to complete the game revolving operation corresponding to the granting of profit. The period becomes longer step by step, and the period required for the profit to be granted becomes longer step by step as the period becomes longer. As a result, it is possible to gradually enhance the function of suppressing the excessively large profit being given to the player in a short time.

Further, when the operation period determining means is gradually lengthened, the natural number is increased when the natural number multiple of the additional period is added to the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means. As a result, the required storage capacity can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which a plurality of types of additional periods are prepared in advance.

Feature G4. When the period changing means changes the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means according to the player's advantage, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is the first operation execution period and A feature characterized by varying the same period from the operation execution period in any of the second operation execution periods (a function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the first to third embodiments). The gaming machine according to any one of G1 to G3.

According to the feature G4, when the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is changed according to the advantage of the player, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is the first operation execution period and the second operation execution period. Since the configuration is such that the same period is changed from the operation execution period regardless of the operation execution period, it is possible to simplify the configuration for changing the operation execution period.

Feature G5. The game control means executes the game rotation operation by controlling the game execution means according to an operation mode information group (data table for game rotation production) stored in advance in the specific storage means (sound light side ROM 83). To be done,
The period changing means changes the operation execution period according to the player's advantage by processing the operation mode information group corresponding to the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means (first). The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that (a function of executing the processing of step S1706 and step S1707 of the sound light side MPU 82 in the embodiment).

According to the feature G5, the operation execution period is changed according to the player's advantage by processing the operation mode information group corresponding to the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means. It is possible to change the operation execution period according to the player's advantage while not increasing the number of operation mode information groups stored in the storage means in advance.

Feature G6. It is a configuration in which a variable display of a pattern is performed in the game rotation operation.
As the display mode of the pattern in the variation display of the pattern, a high identification display mode (low-speed fluctuation display) and a low identification display mode (high-speed fluctuation display) in which the distinctiveness of the pattern by appearance is relatively high or low are set. ,
As a mode of variable display of the pattern, after the state in which all the patterns are displayed in the low identification display mode continues for a predetermined period, the predetermined pattern is switched to the state in which the predetermined pattern is displayed in the high identification display mode. Has a mode,
The period changing means changes the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means according to the player's advantage by changing the period during which all the patterns are displayed in the low identification display mode ( The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that (a function of executing the processing of step S1706 and step S1707 of the sound light side MPU 82 in the first embodiment).

According to the feature G6, by varying the period displayed in the low identification display mode, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is changed according to the player's advantage. It is not necessary to store the information for determining the mode of the variable display of the pattern corresponding to each of the patterns whose execution period can be changed. Further, when the operation execution period is changed, the period in which all the symbols are displayed in the low identification display mode is changed. Therefore, the variable display mode of the symbols is processed according to the fluctuation in the operation execution period. Even if it does, it will be difficult to give the player a sense of discomfort.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of features G1 to G6, any one of features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, and features G1 to G6. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to the features of the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, the feature E group, the feature F group, and the feature G group, the following problems are solved. Is possible.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these game machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed so that the player can predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry section provided in the game area, and a variable display of the pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. It is known that when a winning result is obtained, a combination of specific patterns and the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface to shift to a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is preferable that an appropriate profit is given to the player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating game machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 27 ... Game ball launch mechanism, 31 ... General winning opening, 32 ... Special electric winning device, 33 ... 1st operating port, 34 ... 2nd operating port, 37 ... Special figure unit, 41 ... Design display device, 62 ... Main side MPU, 63 ... Main side ROM, 64 ... Main side RAM, 64c ... Total number of rounds counter, 77 ... Payout control device, 82 ... Sound light side MPU, 83 ... Sound light side ROM, 92 ... Display side MPU , 173 ... Target ball output rate area, 181 ... Renso counter, 185 ... 1st base arrangement table, 186 ... 2nd base arrangement table, 187 ... 3rd base arrangement table, 188 ... 4th base arrangement table, 191 ... Normal Period table, 192 ... Shortening period table, 195 ... 1st base sequence table, 196 ... 2nd base sequence table, 197 ... 3rd base sequence table, G3 ... Remaining time image.

Claims (9)

A profit-giving means for giving a profit to a player based on the occurrence of a profit-giving event due to the game being performed,
A situation-determining means for determining the subsequent game situation according to the player's advantage,
A game machine characterized by being equipped with. By changing the target period, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit-giving event can change.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the situation-determining means varies the target period according to the player's advantage. When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage or the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the situation-determining means makes the target period longer than before. The gaming machine according to claim 2. As the predetermined advantage, at least a first predetermined advantage and a second predetermined advantage in which the player's advantage is higher than the first predetermined advantage are set.
The situation determining means
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage, the target period is made longer than before. ,
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second predetermined advantage, the target period is made longer than before. ,
The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the gaming machine is provided with. Provided with a supply means for supplying the game ball to the game area at a predetermined cycle when the supply operation is performed by the player in a situation where the game ball can be supplied.
The profit-giving event has a configuration that occurs when a game ball enters the ball-entry means provided in the game area.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4, wherein the target period is the predetermined cycle. The game rounding operation is started based on the start trigger, and the game rounding operation is ended based on the end trigger, as one of the game rounds. A game control means for controlling a game execution means so that a diversion operation is executed is provided.
The game control means includes an operation period determining means for determining an operation execution period in which the game rotation operation is executed.
The profit-giving event has a configuration that occurs after the game circulation operation corresponding to the profit-giving is completed.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 5, wherein the target period is the operation execution period or the average period of the operation execution period. The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein the situation-determining means changes the mode of determining the operation execution period by the operation period-determining means according to the advantage of the player. An information storage means for storing a plurality of types of period information groups in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set is provided.
The operation period determining means determines the operation execution period by referring to the period information group of the type according to the game situation.
The plurality of types of the period information groups are set so that the average period of the operation execution period determined by being referred to by the operation period determining means is different.
The gaming machine according to claim 7, wherein the situation determining means makes the type of the period information group referred to by the operating period determining means different according to the advantage of the player. The information storage means stores at least a first period information group and a second period information group whose average period of the operation execution period is shorter than that of the first period information group as the period information group.
The operation period determining means is
A means for determining the operation execution period with reference to the first period information group in the first game situation, and
A means for determining the operation execution period with reference to the second period information group in the second game situation, and
With
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the situation determining means makes the operation period determining means refer to the first period information group even in the second gaming situation. The gaming machine according to claim 8.

Images